Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
Blackmagic
Studio Cameras
June 2017
English 3
50
Franais 98
Deutsch 146
Espaol 194
245
296
338
English
Welcome
Thank you for purchasing a Blackmagic Studio Camera!
We are extremely excited to have designed the Blackmagic Studio Camera and Micro
Studio Camera 4K. Ever since I was a teenager I have loved live production, its so exciting!
Traditionally cameras with talkback and tally were very expensive and physically large,
so hard to manage. We really wanted to solve this problem by designing a more compact
camera that included all the talkback, tally and camera control features of physically
much larger cameras.
Thats why the Blackmagic Studio Camera was developed. We wanted to build a much
smaller camera for portability, however normally small cameras have small tiny screens.
We did not want that. What we really wanted was a much larger viewfinder! The result is
Blackmagic Studio Camera, a small broadcast camera with a very large viewfinder thats
wonderful to use! Precise focus and framing are so easy with a viewfinder this large!
Of course you get tally indicators, talkback, of course a fantastic quality camera with
flexible MFT lens mount. Its everything you need in a complete package! You can plug
in larger wind protected microphones even with phantom power and with user installable
optical fiber, you can add an SFP module when you need to run your camera miles away
from your switcher! If you need, you can even add a HyperDeck Shuttle and use the
camera for general production use!
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K takes the small size and capability of Blackmagic
Studio Camera even further! This tiny camera pairs an amazing Ultra HD sensor with
an incredibly tiny chassis and a host of remote control options. Now you can capture
broadcast production footage from previously impossible locations, all with complete
control from an ATEM switcher or via custom remote.
We hope you use your new camera for some amazing live productions and produce some
fantastic looking work! We are extremely excited to see what creative work you produce!
Grant Petty
CEO Blackmagic Design
Contents
Blackmagic Studio Cameras
Contents
Getting Started
Attaching a Lens
Getting started with your Blackmagic Studio Camera or Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K is
as simple as attaching a lens and turning the camera on. To remove the protective dust cap
from the lens mount, hold down the locking button and rotate the cap counterclockwise until it
is released. We recommend you always turn off your Blackmagic camera prior to attaching or
removing a lens.
To attach a lens:
1 Align the dot on your lens with the dot on the camera mount. Many lenses have either
ablue, red or white dot or some other indicator.
2 Twist the lens clockwise until it locks into place.
3 To remove the lens, hold down the locking button, rotate the lens counterclockwise
until its dot or indicator reaches the 12 oclock position and gently remove.
When no lens is attached to the camera, the lens mount is exposed to dust and other debris so
youll want to keep the dust cap on whenever possible.
1 1
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
2 2
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
TIP Blackmagic Studio Camera HD and Studio Camera 4K have internal batteries that
can be charged using the supplied power adapter. These camera can be charged and
operated while connected via external power and will switch between power sources
without interruption. Blackmagic Studio Camera 2 and Studio Camera 4K 2 does not
contain an internal battery and does not need to be charged.
Getting Started 5
Micro Studio Camera 4K accepts LP-E6 and LP-E6N batteries, which can be charged with an
external battery charger or slowly trickle charged by the camera. The camera can also be
charged and operated via external power and will switch between power sources automatically
if external power is interrupted. External power is provided via the Micro Studio Camera 4Ks
expansion port.
1 Press the power button on the right hand side of the camera. The tally light will glow
white to indicate the camera is on.
2 Press and hold the power button to switch off your camera.
Thats all there is to getting started. You can now connect your camera to a switcher,
orATEMConverter, and start creating your live production!
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
SDI IN
REF
REF
12V
12V
Connecting to a switcher
Your Blackmagic Studio Camera and Micro Studio Camera 4K can be remotely controlled from
an ATEM switcher via SDI for fast, interactive camera control during your live production.
TIP If you have the optional SFP Optical Module installed, you can use optical fiber to
connect your Blackmagic Studio Camera to an ATEM Switcher. This is great for long
cable runs as optical fiber can carry a signal up to 28 miles.
An ATEM Studio Converter or ATEM Talkback Converter 4K is required to complete the
connection to your ATEM Switcher. For more information on optical fiber setup refer to
the connection diagrams section in the ATEM Converters manual.
Getting Started 6
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1 IN 3 1 1 3 1 REMOTE REMOTE
1 3 5 1 7 3 9 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH
STEREO IN
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
Getting Started 7
Connecting to a Recorder
You can also connect your Blackmagic Studio Camera to an external recorder, for example a
Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio disk recorder for indoor studio recording. Or even mount a
HyperDeck Shuttle or Blackmagic Video Assist to your studio camera and loop through to the
switcher for ISO recordings during an outside broadcast.
Thats all there is to getting started! Live production is exciting and your Blackmagic Studio
Camera is designed to give you an easy and fun experience. Please keep reading the manual
to learn about all the different features and settings on your Blackmagic Studio Camera.
Getting Started 8
Camera Features
Blackmagic Studio Camera Features
Front Panel
1 Front Tally Light
Indicates to the on-air talent which camera is currently live. See the monitoring
settings section in this manual for more details.
2
3
4
1
PUSH
5 2
PUSH
Left Panel
2 LANC Remote
2.5mm stereo jack for LANC remote control supports iris, zoom and focus control.
3 Aviation Headphones
0.25 TRS connector for monitoring PGM and control room audio with aviation
style headsets.
4 Headphones Microphone Input
0.206 TRS connector for talking to the control room with aviation style headsets.
5 Audio Inputs
2 x 1/4 balanced XLR connectors for audio input.
Refer to the Blackmagic Studio Camera - left panel section in this manual for
more details.
Camera Features 9
Right Panel
6 Optical Input/Output
Optical input and output allows cable runs of up to 28 miles when the optional SFP
optical module is fitted.
7 SDI Out
SDI output for connecting to a switcher or other device.
8 SDI In
SDI input allows the camera operator to view the Program (PGM) output.
9 Reference Input
Allows multiple cameras to be genlocked to a blackburst or tri-level reference signal.
10 Power
12 24V power input for power supply and battery charging, where applicable.
Refer to the Blackmagic Studio Camera - right panel section in this manual for
more details.
12
11
6 OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
7 SDI OUT
8 SDI IN
9 REF
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 18 20 21 22 10 12V
Rear Panel
11 10 LCD
Monitor live camera output or program output, or view the menu. See the monitoring
settings in this manual for more details.
12 Rear Tally Light
When lit, it indicates to the camera operator that their camera is currently live.
13 Focus Button
Press once to auto focus or twice to display focus peaking on the LCD.
14 Iris Button
Press once for auto exposure.
15 Push To Talk Button (PTT)
Press and HOLD to talk. Press twice in quick succession for hands free communication.
Press again to revert to the default behavior.
16 Program (PGM) Button
Press to toggle between live camera output and program output from a switcher
control room.
17 Look Up Table (LUT) Button
Currently not implemented.
Camera Features 10
12V
19 Set Button
SDI IN
20 Display Button
OPTICAL IN
OPTICAL OUT
Bottom Panel
23 USB Connector
USB Mini-B port for camera firmware updates. See Blackmagic Camera Setup section in
this manual.
23
1 2 4
5
6
PUSH
7
3
2
8
PUSH
Camera Features 11
Left Panel
2 HDMI Out
The HDMI output lets you preview your video output and navigate the camera menus
using external monitors such as Blackmagic Video Assist. Output resolution is always
1080HD, regardless of the camera resolution, and you can choose to display overlays
such as frame guides, a histogram, and audio levels. See the monitoring settings
section in this manual for more detail.
3 Expansion Port
DB-HD15 connector. Used for external power input and a range of remote control
options as well as reference input. See the section Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera
4K Expansion Cable for details.
4 Menu Button
Use the menu buttons to access the cameras built in menu which can be displayed on
an attached HDMI display.
5 Up Button
Use the button to navigate menus.
6 Down Button
Use this button to navigate menus.
7 Set Button
Use this button to confirm your menu selections.
8 Power Button
Press the power button to turn on the Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K. Press and
hold the button to turn the camera off.
Right Panel
9 Analog Audio In
3.5mm stereo audio input, switchable between microphone and line-level
input in menu.
10 SDI Out
SDI output for connecting to a switcher, external recorder or other device.
11 SDI In
SDI input allows camera control via ATEM switchers or the Blackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino Shield.
12 Headphone / Talkback
3.5mm jack for talkback with iPhone and Android style headsets. Double
press the play/pause button on your headset to toggle talkback on
and press it once again to turn talkback off.
10
13
11
12
Camera Features 12
Rear Panel
13 Battery Slot
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K comes with one LP-E6 battery which fits into this
slot. The battery will be trickle charged while the camera is connected to power via its
expansion port.
Top Panel
14 Battery Release
Slide forward to release the battery.
Bottom Panel
15 USB Connector
USB port for camera firmware updates. See the Blackmagic Camera Setup section in
this manual.
14
15
Camera Connections
Blackmagic Studio Camera - Left Side
LANC Remote Control
The remote port on your camera is used to remotely control lens focus, iris and zoom
adjustments when using a compatible lens. The port takes a 2.5 mm stereo jack using the
standard LANC protocol.
Active MFT lenses allow you to control the zoom servo with a LANC controller. The following
lenses are currently supported:
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 Power O.I.S. Lens
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 45-175mm f/4.0-5.6 Zoom O.I.S. Lens
Olympus M.Zuiko Digital ED 12-50mm f/3.5-6.3 EZ Micro 4/3 Lens
Olympus M.Zuiko Digital ED 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 EZ Micro 4/3 Lens
Headphones Output
For monitoring program and control room audio with aviation style headsets with fixed wing
connectors. Aviation headsets range from single ear models for use in studio environments to
full size noise cancelling models which are suitable for loud concerts or sporting events. Audio
is taken from channel 15 and 16 of the incoming SDI signal. Channels 15 and 16 are rarely if ever
used during production and so are very suitable to serve for the audio talkback.
Camera Connections 13
Headphones Microphone Input
For talking to the control room with aviation style headsets. Audio is embedded into channel
15and 16 of the SDI signal output.
Audio Inputs
Two channels of professional balanced analog audio is supported via XLR connectors. Use the
audio menu to set the input levels for each channel. The inputs support both mic level inputs
and line level inputs and the input type is also selected from the audio menu. Audio is
embedded into channel 1 and 2 of the SDI stream.
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
SDI Out
Use the SDI Out connector to output 10-bit 4:2:2 video to professional SDI video equipment
such as routers, monitors, SDI capture devices and broadcast switchers. Blackmagic Studio
Camera HD supports 3G-SDI, and Studio Camera 4K supports 12G-SDI.
SDI In
The SDI input allows the camera operator to view the Program (PGM) output. Simply press the
PGM button to toggle between live camera output and Program output from a switcher
control room.
If both optical and SDI inputs are connected, the output from the device which was connected
first will be used. If youre using the Studio Camera to record to a device such as the
Blackmagic Hyperdeck Shuttle, the output from the Hyperdeck can be connected to the SDI
input so you can playback what you have just recorded.
Camera Connections 14
Reference Input
This allows multiple cameras to be genlocked to a blackburst or tri-level reference signal.
Genlocking cameras to an external reference signal helps to prevent timing errors which may
result in the picture jumping when switching between different cameras.
Power
Use the 12 - 24V power input for connecting your power supply and to charge the internal
battery in Blackmagic Studio Camera HD and Blackmagic Studio Camera 4K. When the battery
in these cameras is charged it will power the camera for up to 4 hours on Studio Camera HD,
and up to 3 hours on Studio Camera 4K.
Blackmagic Studio Camera 2 and Studio Camera 4K 2 do not have internal batteries.
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
REF
12V
MENU
EXPANSION
SET
Camera Connections 15
Expansion Port
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4Ks small size makes it easy to capture unique shots from
close to the action or difficult to reach spots. While your Micro Studio Camera 4K can be easily
tucked away out of sight, the same cant always be said of a camera operator. So being able to
remotely control your camera is important to making full use of its tiny size.
You can adjust some settings on Micro Studio Camera 4K via SDI input with an ATEM Switcher,
as detailed in the section Introducing Camera Control in this manual. However, the majority of
control options are provided by the expansion port.
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4Ks DB-HD15 connector provides a wide range of connections,
including power, LANC remote, pan, tilt, zoom and genlock via the expansion cable included.
We encourage you to use a wide range of easily available cables to access specific features, or to
solder your own custom connections and adapt the Micro Studio Camera 4K to your needs. See the
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K Expansion Cable section in this manual for more information.
SDI Out
Use the SDI out connector to output 10-bit 4:2:2 video to professional SDI video equipment
such as routers, monitors, SDI capture devices and broadcast switchers. Blackmagic Micro
Studio Camera 4K supports 6G-SDI. You will need a DIN 1.0/2.3 to SDI adapter cable to connect
to devices with full size SDI connectors.
SDI In
Use the SDI in connector to control your Micro Studio Camera 4K via ATEM switchers. Refer to
the section Introducing Camera Control for information about which controls are available.
TIP You can also control your Micro Studio Camera via a Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino
Shield. The shield embeds the same Blackmagic control data packets in the SDI signal
as you would get with an ATEM switcher. This means by connecting the program return
feed from any SDI switcher, through the shield to the SDI input on your camera, you can
access all the same Blackmagic camera controls you get with ATEM switchers.
Camera Connections 16
Headphone / Talkback audio
The 3.5mm headphone / talkback input lets you talk to the control room with iPhone or Android
style headsets. Double press the play/pause button on your headset to enable talkback, and
press once to disable. Audio is embedded into channel 15 and 16 of the SDI signal output.
Customization
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K Expansion Cable
There are two ways to access the expansion ports functions. You can use the expansion cable
that comes with your Micro Studio Camera 4K, or solder your own custom connectors.
The expansion cable provides connectors for the following control options.
4 Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable
1 Power Input
The 12V power input connects via a DC jack and provides power to the Micro Studio
Camera 4K, as well as trickle charging any batteries attached. When mains power is
supplied, the camera will automatically turn on.
2 Reference Input
This allows multiple cameras to be genlocked to a blackburst or tri-level reference
signal. Genlocking cameras to an external reference signal helps to prevent timing errors
which may result in the picture jumping when switching between different cameras.
3 LANC
Connect wired LANC remote controllers to the 2.5mm jack for controlling functions like
zoom, iris adjustment, and focus from a tripod arm when using compatible lenses.
4 Pan Tilt Zoom
The RS-422 connector is used to relay pan tilt zoom commands received by
MicroStudio Camera 4K from its SDI input to a motorized head.
Customization 17
5 B4 Communication
The DB-9 connector allows you to power and control B4 broadcast lenses attached to
the Micro Studio Camera 4K via an MFT to B4 adapter. To control a compatible B4 lens,
simply connect the optional Digital B4 Control Adapter cable to the cable from the lens,
then connect the other end to the DB-9 serial connector on your expansion cable.
You can adjust settings such as iris, focus and zoom in the same way you would an
active MFT lens, either via an ATEM switcher using the camera control page, or via
other remote control interfaces that can be connected to the Micro Studio Camera 4K
expansion cable. For a list of supported B4 digital lenses, refer to the Blackmagic
Design support center at www.blackmagicdesign.com/support/faq/59011
6 S.Bus Digital Servo
By connecting to a compatible S.Bus receiver using the Futaba J cable, you have 18
S.Bus remote channels where features of the camera can be assigned to and remotely
controlled. These features can include focus, servo zoom, iris control and other such
features. For more information about mapping functions to S.Bus remote channels, see
the Remote Settings section of this manual.
P1 PIN ASSIGNMENT
2 S. Bus 1
2 P2
GROUND 3
GROUND 1
12 PTZ RS422 Rx- 2
8 PTZ RS422 Tx+ 3 5
9
GROUND 4 4
GROUND
5
6
3
2
8
7 P3
6
13 PTZ RS422 Rx+ 7 1
5 15
GROUND 1
10 14 B4 Lens Control Transmit 2 5
9
4 14 4
15 B4 Lens Control Receive 3
P4
9 8
3 13 3
8 GROUND 4 2
7
2
7
12 6 Power +12V in* 5 1
6
1 11 OTHER
6
* Power input to the camera is also used to power the lens. Beware of applying excessive voltages if youre using
your own power supply to avoid damage to the lens.
Customization 18
Settings
You can change settings on your Blackmagic camera to get the best picture, such as video
format, shutter speed and white balance, plus you can adjust audio levels, monitoring settings,
and studio tally and talkback settings for effective communication with the control room.
This section of the manual contains detailed information on each of the settings in your camera.
Camera Settings
To configure the camera settings on your Blackmagic Studio Camera or Blackmagic Micro
Studio Camera 4K, press the menu button. Use the menu navigation buttons to highlight items
and press the set button to confirm your selection.
If you are using the Micro Studio Camera 4K, you will need to connect an external monitor via
the cameras HDMI port to view menu settings.
Video Format
Select your desired video format using the navigation buttons. For example, to select between
1080p and 1080i formats, press the left or right arrow buttons to progress through the format
options. Press the set button to confirm the format you want.
A list of supported video formats is provided later in this section.
Gain
Gain settings are helpful when you are shooting in low light conditions. The default setting is
0dB and gain can be increased in 6dB increments up to 18dB.
Detail
Use this setting to sharpen your image live from your Studio Camera. Decrease or increase the
level of sharpening by selecting off or default for low sharpening, medium and high.
Auto Exposure
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K gives you several auto exposure options.
Iris
Maintains a constant shutter speed while changing the aperture to achieve a constant exposure.
Shutter
Maintains a constant aperture while changing the shutter speed to achieve a constant exposure.
Settings 19
Iris + Shutter
Mantains the correct exposure levels by adjusting the aperture. If the maximum or minimum
available aperture is reached and exposure still cannot be maintained, Micro Studio Camera 4K
will begin adjusting the shutter speed to keep exposure constant.
Shutter + Iris
Maintains the correct exposure levels by adjusting the shutter speed. If the maximum or
minimum available shutter speed is reached and exposure still cannot be maintained,
MicroStudio Camera 4K will begin adjusting the aperture to keep exposure constant.
Manual Trigger
Iris aperture and shutter speed are set manually and exposure may vary with changing light
conditions.
White Balance
Eighteen white balance presets are selectable for a variety of color temperature conditions.
2500, 2800, 3000, 3200, 3400, 3600, 4000, 4500 and 4800K for various conditions
under tungsten, incandescent or fluorescent light, or under dull natural light including
candle light, sunrise/sunset, morning, and after noon light.
5000, 5200, 5400 and 5600K for outdoors on a clear, sunny day.
6000, 6500, 7000, 7500 and 8000K for a variety of daylight conditions.
Shutter Speed
Shutter speed complements the gain setting by regulating the amount of light on the sensor.
There are 15 different shutter speeds available ranging from 1/50 sec to 1/2000 sec.
Settings 20
Blackmagic Studio Blackmagic Studio Blackmagic Micro Studio
Camera Camera 4K Camera 4K
2160p23.98 2160p29.97
2160p24 2160p30
2160p25
2160p29.97
2160p30
2160p50
2160p59.94
2160p60
Audio Settings
To adjust audio input and audio monitoring settings on your Blackmagic Studio Camera,
pressthe menu button and select the microphone icon to the left of the display. Use the menu
navigation buttons to highlight menus and use the set button to confirm your selection.
Settings 21
Automatic Gain Control
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K features an automatic audio gain control setting that lets
camera adjust the audio recording levels. It automatically reduces the audio gain levels if the
input level gets too loud and subtly raises it if it is too low.
Audio Input
Switches audio between using the cameras internal microphone and the XLR audio connectors.
Microphone Level
Microphone input adjusts the recording levels of the built in microphone. Move the audio
sliderleft or right to increase or decrease levels. Studio Camera has a built in stereo
microphone. The built in microphone records to audio channels 1 and 2 when no external audio
source isconnected.
Input Level
External audio connectors support audio at microphone level or line level. Select Line when
connecting external audioequipmentsuch as an audio mixer or amplifier.Select the mic low or
mic high setting depending on the signal strength of your microphone. Its important to select
the appropriate level to avoid your external audio sounding almost inaudible or too hot and
distorted. Set the external audio input levels by using the left and right arrows.
Ch 1 Input
Move the audio slider icon left or right to increase or decrease levels for channel 1. The external
audio input overrides the built in microphone and is output to audio channel 1.
Ch 2 Uses Ch 1 Input
Select on if you want to embed channel 1 external audio into channels 1 and 2 of the SDI or the
optional optical fiber output. This is the same as connecting input 1 to both audio channels in
the camera and is useful when using microphones with a single mini audio output and you need
to connect both stereo audio channels to it. Select this setting to off if you want channel 1 audio
to remain on one channel only and channel 2 will take audio from the channel 2 audio input,
which is preferred when using stereo audio sources.
Ch 2 Input
Move the audio slider icon left or right to increase or decrease levels for channel 2.
Theexternal audio input overrides the built in microphone and is output to audio channel 2.
Phantom Power
Phantom power supplies power through microphone cables and is a convenient power source for
condenser microphones. Enable or disable phantom power for studio cameras with XLR inputs by
navigating to the audio menu and selecting on or off using the arrow buttons. Phantom power is
automatically disabled when the line input level setting is selected. Be sure to wait at least 10
seconds for phantom power to discharge after disconnecting before plugging in a self powered
microphone. Older ribbon type microphones are not suitable for phantom power usage.
Monitoring Settings
To adjust the display settings for the LCD, press the menu button and select the monitor
icon. Use the menu navigation buttons to highlight menus and use the set button to confirm
your selection.
Settings 22
Monitoring settings - Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K.
HDMI Meters
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K gives you the option to select which meters you want to
display on the HDMI output.
Histogram
The histogram shows the contrast between whites and blacks along a horizontal scale.
The left edge of the histogram displays shadows, or blacks, and the far right displays highlights,
or whites. When you close or open the lens aperture, youll notice the information in the
histogram moves to the left or right accordingly.
This setting toggles the histogram on and off. When on, this will appear in the bottom right
corner of an attached monitor when HDMI overlays are set to on.
Audio
The audio meter represents the current volume of left and right audio channels in two horizontal
bars. Left is on top, right is on the bottom. If your audio levels rise too high, your audio peaks
can be clipped and you will hear distortion in your audio. To avoid this, adjust the audio gain on
your camera until your audio levels stay within safe levels.
This setting toggles the audio meter on and off. When on, this will appear in the bottom left
corner of an attached monitor when HDMI overlay are set to on.
HDMI Overlays
This setting is only available on Micro Studio Camera 4K. When set to on, HDMI video output
will include frame guides and information about the camera settings and identity, as well
as any meters enabled via the HDMI meters setting.
Brightness
Move the slider icon left or right to adjust brightness settings for the LCD. The default
setting is 60%.
Zebra
Blackmagic Cameras have a zebra feature which gives an indication of exposure levels.
Diagonal lines will appear across any part of the video that exceeds the zebra exposure level.
Turn zebra on and select the desired zebra warning level by using the left and right arrows.
Thedefault setting is medium.
Settings 23
Focus Peaking
Allows you to change the level of focus peaking. The settings include: off, low, medium and
high. Adjust this setting when you are using a very sharp lens and the peaking covers the entire
image. The default setting is medium.
Studio Settings
To adjust the display settings for the LCD, press the menu button and select the headphones
icon. Use the menu navigation buttons to highlight menus and use the set button to confirm
your selection.
Camera Number
If you want your Studio Camera to receive tally signals from an ATEM switcher, youll need to set
the camera number on your camera. This ensures the switcher sends the tally signal to the
correct camera. The camera number can be set to a value of 1-99. The default setting is 1.
Settings 24
TIP You can also connect the program return feed from any SDI switcher to your
camera via a Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shield and display tally on each camera.
AllSDI switchers that have open collector tally outputs are configurable for tally using
the Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shield. Refer to the section titled Connecting tally
using the Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shield for more information.
Reference Source
Used to select the genlock source. The Studio Camera can lock to program SDI input or
external genlock source. If using an external genlock source, be aware that changing that
source will most likely cause a glitch as the camera locks to the new source.
Reference Timing
Allows you to manually adjust the reference timing on a line or pixel basis.
Headset Level
Move the volume slider left or right to increase or decrease audio monitoring levels. The default
setting is 50%.
Program Mix
Changes the balance of camera sound to talkback sound. The headphones will output audio
following what is displayed on the LCD. For instance, if you are in camera view, camera audio is
heard. And if you are in program view, program audio is heard. The default setting is 0%.
Remote Settings
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K features an additional menu for setting remote functions.
Ifyou are using S.Bus to control your camera, you can use this menu to assign functions such,
iris, shutter speed and so on to individual S.Bus channels. Simply select the function you wish to
control and assign an available channel using the up, down and set buttons.
Settings 25
Button Settings
Adjusting Lens Settings
Blackmagic Studio Camera supports electronic lens control, which allows you to adjust lens
settings such as aperture and auto focus. The focus peaking feature creates a green edge
around the sharpest parts of the image so you can easily confirm your focus. Focus peaking is
only visible on the LCD and does not affect the SDI output.
Focus Button
When using the Studio Camera with an auto focus lens, press the focus button for focus
peaking or auto focus. Press the focus button once to auto focus. A quick double press of the
focus button activates focus peaking.
When using a manual lens, press the focus button once for focus peaking.
Iris Button
When using video dynamic range settings, a single press of the iris button will set an average
exposure based on the highlights and shadows in your shot. When using film dynamic range
settings, pressing the iris button sets your exposure to accommodate the brightest highlight in
your shot. To set your aperture manually on your Studio camera, press the up and down menu
navigation buttons.
Additional Settings
Push to Talk (PTT) Button
When doing live production it is vital that camera operators can talk to the director and others
within the control room. Simply press and hold the button to begin talking. Press twice in quick
succession for hands free communication. Press again to revert to the default behavior.
Set Button
Use this button to confirm your menu selections.
Display Button
Press this button to display useful information on your Studio Cameras 10 monitor, including:
Frame guides with camera and lens settings such as camera number, video format and
frame rate, shutter speed, white balance, battery life, gain setting and f-stop number.
Press the Disp button again to turn overlays off and monitor the image only. Overlays are visible
on the 10 monitor. The SDI output is always clean.
NOTE Blackmagic Studio Camera 2 and Studio Camera 4K 2 to do not have internal
batteries, these cameras will not display battery life remaining.
Settings 26
Menu Button
OPTICAL OUT Press this button to bring up the menu and then use the arrow buttons to navigate.
OPTICAL IN
Power Button
SDI OUT
Press the power button to turn on the Blackmagic Studio Camera. Press and hold the button to
SDI IN turn the camera.
REF
12V
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT FOCUS IRIS SET PTT PGM LUT
DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRISSET PTT PGM DISPLAY
LUT MENU SET DISPLAY MENU
SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU
Press the focus button once Press the iris button for auto The Studio Camera features
to auto focus. A quick double exposure or use the up and settings like PTT and
press of the focus button down navigation controls PGM which are essential
activates focus peaking. for manual exposure. for live production.
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
SDI IN
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
REF
SDI IN
REF
12V
12V
Connect the cameras SDI output to the HyperDecks SDI input and connect the
HyperDecks SDI output to the cameras SDI input to view your recordings.
Blackmagic Switcher
Camera Number Input Number Arduino Pin
1 1 D2
2 2 D3
3 3 D4
4 4 D5
5 5 D6
6 6 D7
7 7 D8
8 8 D9
The example sketch above shows how the Blackmagic Arduino shield is programmed to detect
a tally signal for input 1 or 2 via the switchers tally output, and then embed that tally signal into
the shields SDI output. The tally light on the corresponding camera will then illuminate.
PUSH
2
After downloading the Blackmagic Camera Setup software and unzipping the downloaded file,
you should see a Blackmagic Camera Setup installer window. Double click on the installer icon
and follow the onscreen prompts to complete the installation.
After the installation is complete, click on the Windows start menu, and go to all programs.
Click on the Blackmagic Design folder to open the Blackmagic Camera setup software and
instruction manuals.
The Mini-B USB 2.0 ports are located on the underside of the cameras.
Other Accessories
For studio use, you might want to mount the camera on a pedestal and add rails for large
broadcast lenses and teleprompters. For outside broadcast use, your may want to attach
microphones, external batteries, or LANC remote controllers. The camera includes two 3/8
mounting points on the bottom, and ten 1/4 mounting points on the sides and the top.
This means you have the flexibility to customize your rig for any size production.
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1 IN 3 1 1 3 1 REMOTE REMOTE
1 3 5 1 7 3 9 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH
STEREO IN
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
Connect your Blackmagic Studio Camera to any of the ATEM switchers SDI inputs.
3 1 4 2 OUT
3OUT OUT
4
L R
UT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT IN IN SDI OUT IN
L +12V
R BACKUP L L R R L L R R L R
POWER USB 2.0
OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
ANALOG AUDIO OUTAUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
OUT AUDIO OUT PGM SDI OPTICAL
MICOUT/IN H/PHONE ANALOG AUDIO OUT OP
L R
+12V BACKUP L R L R L R L R
POWER USB 2.0 OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT PGM SDI MIC H/PHONE
Connect multiple Blackmagic Studio Cameras via optical fiber using an ATEM Studio Converter.
Color Wheel
The color wheel is a powerful feature of the DaVinci Resolve color corrector and used to make
color adjustments to each YRGB channels lift, gamma and gain settings. You can select which
setting to adjust by clicking on the three selection buttons above the color wheel.
Master Wheel
Use the master wheel below the color wheel to make contrast adjustments to all YRGB
channels at once, or luminance only for each lift, gamma or gain setting.
Camera Settings
The camera settings button near the bottom left of the master wheel lets you turn on the color
bars feature in Blackmagic Studio Cameras, Micro Studio Cameras and URSA mini, plus adjust
detail settings for each cameras picture signal.
Detail
Use this setting to sharpen the image from your cameras live. Decrease or increase the level of
sharpening by selecting: Detail off, detail default for low sharpening, medium detail, and
high detail.
Reset Buttons
The reset button near the bottom right of each camera controller lets you easily choose color
correction settings to reset, copy or paste. Each color wheel also has its own reset button.
Press to restore a setting to its default state, or copy/paste a setting. Locked controllers are not
affected by the Paste feature.
The master reset button on the bottom right corner of the color corrector panel lets you reset lift,
gamma and gain color wheels plus Contrast, Hue, Saturation and Lum Mix settings. You can paste
color correction settings to camera controllers individually, or all cameras at once for a unified
look. Iris, focus, coarse and pedestal settings are not affected by the Paste feature. When
applying Paste to all, a warning message will appear asking you to confirm your action. This is
so you dont accidentally paste new settings to any unlocked cameras that are currently on air.
Iris/Pedestal Control
The iris/pedestal control is located within the cross hairs of each camera controller. The control
illuminates red when its camera is on air.
To open or close the iris, drag the control up or down. Holding the shift key allows only iris
adjustments.
To darken or lift the pedestal, drag the control left or right. Holding the command key on a Mac,
or the Control key on Windows, allows only pedestal adjustments.
Zoom Control
When using compatible lenses with an electronic zoom feature, you can zoom your lens in and
out using the zoom control. The controller works just like the zoom rocker on a lens, with
telephoto on one end, and wide angle on the other. Click on the zoom control, located above
the coarse slider, and drag up to zoom in, or drag down to zoom out.
If your lens does not have active lens control or your camera does not support zoom control via
the SDI camera control protocol then these settings will have no affect. If you are using
Blackmagic Studio Camera or Blackmagic Studio Camera 4K, please make sure you have
updated your camera software to v1.9.11 or later to ensure your camera has support for
controlling MFT lenses with active zoom.
Coarse Setting
The coarse setting is located to the left of the iris/pedestal control and is used to limit the iris
range. This feature helps you prevent over exposed images from going to air.
To set your coarse threshold, completely open the iris using the iris control, then drag the
coarse setting up or down to set optimum exposure. Now when you adjust the iris, the coarse
threshold will prevent it from going above optimum exposure.
Iris Indicator
The iris indicator is located to the right of the iris/pedestal control and displays a visual
reference so you can easily see how open or closed the lens aperture is. The iris indicator is
affected by the coarse setting.
Camera Gain
The camera gain setting allows you to turn on additional gain in your camera. This is important
when you are operating in low light conditions and need extra gain in the front end of your
camera to avoid your images being under exposed. You can decrease or increase gain by
clicking on the left or right arrows on the dB gain setting.
You can turn on some gain when you need it, such as outdoor shoots when the light fades at sunset
and you need to increase your image brightness. Its worth noting that adding gain will increase noise
in your images.
White Balance
The white balance setting next to the shutter speed control can be adjusted by clicking on the
left or right arrows on each side of the color temperature indicator. Different light sources emit
warm or cool colors, so you can compensate by adjusting the white balance. This ensures the
whites in your image stay white.
Color Wheels
The Lift/Gamma/Gain controls allow tonally specific yet overlapping regions of adjustment.
In photographic terms lift, gamma and gain corresponds to shadows, mid tones and highlights.
Use the color wheels in the following ways to make fine or aggressive adjustments:
Click and drag anywhere within the color ring: Note that you dont need to drag the
color balance indicator itself. As the color balance indicator moves, the RGB parameters
underneath change to reflect the adjustments being made to each channel.
Shift-Click and drag within the color ring: Jumps the color balance indicator to the
absolute position of the pointer, letting you make faster and more extreme adjustments.
Double-click within the color ring: Resets the color adjustment without resetting the
master wheel adjustment for that control.
Click the reset control at the upper-right of a color ring: Resets both the color
balance control and its corresponding master wheel.
Master Wheels
Use the master wheels below the color wheels to adjust each YRGB channels lift, gamma and
gain controls.
Contrast Setting
The Contrast setting gives you control over the distance between the darkest and lightest
values of an image. The effect is similar to making opposing adjustments using the lift and gain
master wheels. The default setting is 50%.
Saturation Setting
The Saturation setting increases or decreases the amount of color in the image. The default
setting is 50%.
Hue Setting
The Hue setting rotates all hues of the image around the full perimeter of the color wheel.
Thedefault setting of 180 degrees shows the original distribution of hues. Raising or lowering
this value rotates all hues forward or backward along the hue distribution as seen on a
color wheel.
Synchronizing Settings
When connected, camera control signals are sent from the ATEM switcher to your Blackmagic
Studio Camera. If a setting is accidentally adjusted from your Studio Camera, camera control will
automatically reset that setting to maintain synchronization.
Overview
The Blackmagic SDI Camera Control Protocol is used by ATEM switchers, Blackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino Shield and Blackmagic Camera Remote to provide Camera Control functionality with
supported Blackmagic Design cameras. Please refer to the Understanding Studio Camera
Control chapter section of this manual, or the ATEM Switchers Manual and SDKmanual for
more information. These can be downloaded at www.blackmagicdesign.com/support.
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni directional stream of small
control messages embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream.
Thevideo stream containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices.
Device addressing is used to allow the sender to specify which device each message is
directed to.
Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields
are packed from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are
defined as, and can be assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.
Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active
region of VANC line 16.
Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a
maximum of 255 bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to
be sent with a maximum of one frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single
frame, it should use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritize and send immediately.
Lower priority messages can be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.
Developer Information 41
The command id is an 8 bit unsigned integer which indicates themessage
type being sent. Receiving devices should ignore any commands that they
Command id (uint8) do not understand. Commands 0 through 127 are reserved for commands
that apply to multiple types of devices. Commands 128 through 255 are
device specific.
Receiving devices should use the destination device address and or the command identifier to
determine which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip
irrelevant or unknown commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.
Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration
The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. Thepacket length is
Data type (uint8) used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each message
must contain an integral number of data elements.
5: UTF-8 string Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number with
5 bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional component.
128: signed 5.11fixed point The fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11.
The representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995
(15 + 2047/2048).
Developer Information 42
Data types 129 through 255 are available for device specific purposes.
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to the
current parameter values. The resulting parameter value will be clamped
1: offset / toggle value according to their valid range. It is not valid to apply an offset to a void
value. Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert
that value.
Operation types 128through 255 are available for device specific purposes.
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and
Data (void)
number of elements.
The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.
trigger
.1 Instantaneous autofocus void
instantaneous autofocus
Start/stop zooming at
Set continuous specified rate: -1.0=zoom
.9 fixed16 -1 +1.0
zoom (speed) wider fast, 0.0=stop,
+1=zoom tele fast
Developer Information 43
Group ID Parameter Type Index Minimum Maximum Interpretation
1
[0] = frame rate 24, 25, 30, 50, 60
[1] = M-rate 0=regular, 1=M-rate
0=NTSC, 1=PAL, 2=720,
[2] = dimensions 3=1080, 4=2k, 5=2k DCI,
.0 Video mode int8 6=4k, 7=4k DCI
0=progressive,
[3] = interlaced
1=interlaced
[4] =
0=YUV
colour space
.1 Sensor Gain int8 1 16 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x gain
int16 color temp 2500 10000 Colour temperature in K
.2 Manual White Balance
int16 tint -50 50 tint
Calculate and set auto
.3 Set auto WB void
white balance
Use latest auto white
.4 Restore auto WB void
balance setting
.5 Exposure (us) int32 1 42000 time in us
Steps through
availableexposure
.6 Exposure (ordinal) int16 0 n
valuesfrom minimum (0)
tomaximum (n)
int8
.7 Dynamic Range Mode 0 1 0 = film, 1 = video
enum
Video int8
.8 Video sharpening level 0 3
enum
fps as integer
[0] = file
(eg 24, 25, 30,
frame rate
50, 60, 120)
fps as integer, valid when
sensor-off-speed set
[1] = sensor (eg 24,25, 30, 33, 48, 50,
frame rate 60, 120), no change will
beperformed if this value
is set to 0
[2] = frame width in pixels
.9 Recording format int16
[3] =
in pixels
frame height
[0]=file-M-rate
[1]=sensor-M-rate,
valid when sensor-
[4] = flags off-speed-set
[2]=sensor-off-speed
[3]=interlaced
[4]=windowed mode
0=Manual Trigger,
1=Iris,
Set auto
.10 int8 0 4 2=Shutter,
exposure mode
3=Iris + Shutter,
4=Shutter + Iris
Developer Information 44
Group ID Parameter Type Index Minimum Maximum Interpretation
2
0.0=minimum,
.0 Mic level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0.0=minimum,
.1 Headphone level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
Headphone 0.0=minimum,
.2 fixed16 0 1
program mix 1.0=maximum
0.0=minimum,
.3 Speaker level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
Audio 0=internal mic,
1=line level input,
.4 Input type int8 0 2
2=low mic level input,
3=high mic level input
0.0=minimum,
[0] ch0 0 1
1.0=maximum
.5 Input levels fixed16
0.0=minimum,
[1] ch1 0 1
1.0=maximum
true = powered,
.6 Phantom power boolean
false = not powered
3
bit flags: [0] = display
status, [1] = display
frame guides
uint16
.0 Overlay enables Some cameras don't
bit field
allow separate control of
frame guides and
status overlays.
0=off, 1=2.4:1, 2=2.39:1,
Frame guides style [0] = frame
.1 int8 0 8 3=2.35:1, 4=1.85:1, 5=16:9,
(Camera 3.x) guides style
Output 6=14:9, 7=4:3
Frame guides opacity [1] = frame 0.0=transparent,
.2 fixed16 0.1 1
(Camera 3.x) guide opacity 1.0=opaque
0=off, 1=2.4:1, 2=2.39:1,
[0] = frame
3=2.35:1, 4=1.85:1, 5=16:9,
guides style
Overlays 6=14:9, 7=4:3
(replaces .1 and .2 [1] = frame 0=transparent,
.3 int8 0 100
abovefrom guide opacity 100=opaque
Cameras 4.0) percentage of full frame
[2] = safe area
0 100 used by safe area guide
percentage
(0 means off)
4
0.0=minimum,
.0 Brightness fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0x4 = zebra
Display int16
.1 Overlay enables 0x8 = peaking
bit field
0.0=minimum,
.2 Zebra level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
Developer Information 45
Group ID Parameter Type Index Minimum Maximum Interpretation
0.0=minimum,
.3 Peaking level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0=disable bars,
Color bars display
.4 int8 0 30 1-30=enable bars with
time (seconds)
timeout (s)
Developer Information 46
Group ID Parameter Type Index Minimum Maximum Interpretation
8
[0] red -2 2 default 0.0
[1] green -2 2 default 0.0
.0 Lift Adjust fixed16
[2] blue -2 2 default 0.0
[3] luma -2 2 default 0.0
[0] red -4 4 default 0.0
[1] green -4 4 default 0.0
.1 Gamma Adjust fixed16
[2] blue -4 4 default 0.0
[3] luma -4 4 default 0.0
[0] red 0 16 default 1.0
[1] green 0 16 default 1.0
.2 Gain Adjust fixed16
Colour [2] blue 0 16 default 1.0
Correction [3] luma 0 16 default 1.0
[0] red -8 8 default 0.0
[1] green -8 8 default 0.0
.3 Offset Adjust fixed16
[2] blue -8 8 default 0.0
[3] luma -8 8 default 0.0
[0] pivot 0 1 default 0.5
.4 Contrast Adjust fixed16
[1] adj 0 2 default 1.0
Developer Information 47
Example Protocol Packets
Packet
Operation Length Byte
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
parameter
command
operation
reserved
category
length
type
trigger instantaneous
8 4 4 0 0 0 1 0 0
auto focus on camera 4
set exposure to 10 ms on
camera 4 (10 ms = 10000 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00
us = 0x00002710)
1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 12 0 0
Developer Information 48
Blackmagic Embedded TallyControl Protocol
Version 1.0 (30/04/14)
This section is for third party developers or anybody who may wish to add support for the
Blackmagic Embedded Tally Control Protocol to their products or system. It describes the
protocol for sending tally information embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital
video stream.
Data Flow
A master device such as a broadcast switcher embeds tally information into its program feed
which is broadcast to a number of slave devices such as cameras or camera controllers.
The output from the slave devices is typically fed back to the master device, but may also be
sent to a video monitor.
The primary flow of tally information is from the master device to the slaves. Each slave device
may use its device id to extract and display the relevant tally information.
Slave devices pass through the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status,
so that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without
knowledge of the device id they are monitoring.
Assumptions
Any data alignment / padding is explicit in the protocol. Bit fields are packed from LSB first.
Blanking Encoding
One tally control packet may be sent per video frame. Packets are encoded as a SMPTE 291M
packet with DID/SDID x51/x52 in the active region of VANC line 15. A tally control packet may
contain up to 256 bytes of tally information.
Packet Format
Each tally status consists of 4 bits of information:
uint4
bit 0: program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0x0)
The first byte of the tally packet contains the monitor device tally status and a version number.
Subsequent bytes of the tally packet contain tally status for pairs of slave devices. The master
device sends tally status for the number of devices configured/supported, up to a
maximum of 510.
struct tally
uint8
bit 0: monitor device program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: monitor device preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0b00)
bit 4-7: protocol version (0b0000)
Developer Information 49
uint8[0]
bit 0: slave device 1 program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: slave device 1 device preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0b00)
bit 4: slave device 2 program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 5: slave device 2 preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 6-7: reserved (0b00)
uint8[1]
bit 0: slave device 3 program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: slave device 3 device preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0b00)
bit 4: slave device 4 program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 5: slave device 4 preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 6-7: reserved (0b00)
...
Slave Device
(1)
Slave Device
Monitor Device
(3)
3 ...
Developer Information 50
Help
Getting Help
The fastest way to obtain help is to go to the Blackmagic Design online support pages and
check the latest support material available for your camera.
Battery Replacement
The Studio Cameras built in battery is not user-serviceable. Should the battery require
replacement, you will need to send it to your nearest Blackmagic Design service center for
replacement. If the camera is outside of its warranty period, the battery replacement will incur a
small service fee for the cost of the battery, labor and return of the camera to you. Please
contact Blackmagic Design Support to find out details of where to send your camera, how to
package it safely and how much the replacement will cost in your country.
NOTE Blackmagic Studio Camera 2 and Blackmagic Studio Camera 4K 2 do not have
internal batteries.
Help 51
Warranty
12 Month Limited Warranty
Blackmagic Design warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of 12 months from the date of purchase. If a product proves to be
defective during this warranty period, Blackmagic Design, at its option, either will repair the
defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in exchange
for the defective product.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, you the Customer, must notify Blackmagic Design
of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for
the performance of service. The Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the
defective product to a designated service center nominated by Blackmagic Design, with
shipping charges pre paid. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges,
insurance, duties, taxes, and any other charges for products returned to us for any reason.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or
improper or inadequate maintenance and care. Blackmagic Design shall not be obligated to
furnish service under this warranty: a) to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel
other than Blackmagic Design representatives to install, repair or service the product, b) to
repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment, c) to
repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non Blackmagic Design parts or
supplies, or d) to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products
when the effect of such a modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing
the product. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY BLACKMAGIC DESIGN IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. BLACKMAGIC DESIGNS RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS IS THE WHOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF
WHETHER BLACKMAGIC DESIGN OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY ILLEGAL
USE OF EQUIPMENT BY CUSTOMER. BLACKMAGIC IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES
RESULTING FROM USE OF THIS PRODUCT. USER OPERATES THIS PRODUCT AT OWN RISK.
Copyright 2017 Blackmagic Design. All rights reserved. Blackmagic Design, DeckLink, HDLink, Workgroup Videohub,
Multibridge Pro, Multibridge Extreme, Intensity and Leading the creative video revolution are registered trademarks in the
US and other countries. All other company and product names may be trade marks of their respective companies with which
they are associated.
Warranty 52
/
Blackmagic
20176
Blackmagic Studio Camera
MFT
HyperDeck
Shuttle
53 Remote 73
53 74
53 75
54
75
57 76
Blackmagic Studio Camera 57 Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino
Blackmagic Micro Studio Shield
Camera 4K 59 76
61 Blackmagic Camera Setup 78
Blackmagic Studio Camera - 61
79
Blackmagic Studio Camera - 62
Blackmagic Micro Studio 79
Camera 4K - 63 79
Blackmagic Micro Studio ATEM Software Control 79
Camera 4K - 64
79
65 81
Blackmagic Micro Studio DaVinci Resolve
Camera 4K 65 86
Blackmagic Micro Studio
Camera 4K 66
Developer Information 89
Blackmagic SDI Camera Control Protocol 89
67
Blackmagic Embedded
67
TallyControl Protocol 97
Audio 69
99
Monitoring 70
Studio 72 100
Blackmagic Camera
Off
1
2
3 12
1 1
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
2 2
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
Studio Camera/
53
Micro Studio Camera 4KLP-E6LP-E6N
/
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
SDI IN
REF
REF
12V
12V
ACStudio Camera
SDI
1 Blackmagic Studio CameraMicro Studio Camera 4KSDIATEM
SDI
2 ATEMSDIMulti ViewStudio
CameraSDIMulti View
SDI
54
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1 IN 3 1 1 3 1 REMOTE REMOTE
1 3 5 1 7 3 9 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH
STEREO IN
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
ATEMSDISDI
ATEMSDISDI
ATEM Software Control
1 ATEM Software Control
2
1Studio Camera
1 1: Camera 1
3 Blackmagic Studio CameraMENUStudio Settings > Camera Number
Studio Camera 1
ATEMCam 1Camera Number1
Blackmagic Studio CameraPGM
ATEM
1Studio Camera
Blackmagic Studio CameraATEM Software ControlATEM
ATEM Software Control
/ 1C am 1
On Air
Cam 1
ATEM Software Control
55
Blackmagic Studio CameraBlackmagic HyperDeck
StudioHyperDeck Shuttle
Blackmagic Video AssistStudio CameraISO
56
Blackmagic Studio Camera
2
3
4
1
PUSH
5 2
PUSH
2 LANC
LANC2.5mm
3
0.25TRSPGM/
4
0.206TRS
5
1/4 XLR 2
Blackmagic Studio Camera -
57
6 /OPTICAL IN/OUT
SFP
2845km
7 SDISDI OUT
SDI
8 SDISDI IN
SDIPGM
9 REF
3
10
12-24V
Blackmagic Studio Camera -
12
11
6 OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
7 SDI OUT
8 SDI IN
9 REF
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 18 20 21 22 10 12V
11 10LCD
12
13 FOCUS
12LCD
14 IRIS
1
15 PTT
2
16 PGM
17 LUT
58
18
LCD
12V
19 SET REF
SDI IN
20 DISPLAY
SDI OUT
/
OPTICAL IN
21 MENU
OPTICAL OUT
LCD
22
Blackmagic Studio Camera
23 USB
23
1
-
-
-
-
Micro Studio Camera 4K
1 2 4
5
6
7
3
8
PUSH
2
PUSH
59
2 HDMI
HDMIBlackmagic Video Assist
1080HD/
3
DB-HD15
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
4 MENU
HDMI
5
6
7 SET
8
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
9
3.5mmmin/line
10 SDISDI OUT
SDI
11 SDISDI IN
SDIATEMBlackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shield
12 /
3.5mmiPhone/
/21
10
13
11
12
60
13
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4KLP-E61
14
15 USB
USBBlackmagic Camera
Setup
14
15
L A N C2. 5 m m
MFTLANC
PGM/
SDI15161516
61
SDI
1516
2XLR
mic/line
SDI
12
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
2845km
SDI
Blackmagic Studio CameraSFP
Blackmagic Design
www.blackmagicdesign.com/jp/resellers/
SDISDI OUT
SDISDI
SDI10-bit 4:2:2Blackmagic Studio Camera HD3G-SDIStudio
Camera 4K12G-SDI
SDISDI IN
SDIPGMPGM
/
SDI
Studio CameraBlackmagic HyperDeck Shuttle
HyperDeckSDI
62
REF
3
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
REF
12V
HDMI2160p30
HDMI1080p30
MENU
EXPANSION
SET
63
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
Micro Studio Camera 4K
Micro
Studio Camera 4K Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
3.5mmmic/line
SDISDI OUT
SDISDI
SDI10-bit 4:2:2Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K6G-SDI
SDIDIN 1.0/2.3 - SDI
SDISDI IN
SDIATEMMicro Studio Camera 4K
64
/
3.5mm/iPhone/
/2
1SDI1516
4 Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable
1
12VDCMicro Studio Camera 4K
2
3
3 LANC
LANC2.5mm
4 //
RS-422Micro Studio Camera 4KSDI//
65
5 B4
DB-9MFT - B4Micro Studio Camera 4KB4
/B4Digital
B4 Control AdapterDB-9
MFTATEM
Micro Studio Camera 4K
B4
Blackmagic Designhttps://www.blackmagicdesign.com/jp/support/
faq/59011
6 S.Bus
S.BusFutaba J18S.Bus
S.Bus
P1 PIN ASSIGNMENT
2 S. Bus 1
2 P2
GROUND 3
GROUND 1
12 PTZ RS422 Rx- 2
8 PTZ RS422 Tx+ 3 5
9
GROUND 4 4
GROUND
5
6
3
2
8
7 P3
6
13 PTZ RS422 Rx+ 7 1
5 15
GROUND 1
10 14 B4 Lens Control Transmit 2 5
9
4 14 4
15 B4 Lens Control Receive 3
P4
9 8
3 13 3
8 GROUND 4 2
7
2
7
12 6 Power +12V in* 5 1
6
1 11 OTHER
6
* Power input to the camera is also used to power the lens. Beware of applying excessive voltages if youre using
your own power supply to avoid damage to the lens.
66
Blackmagic
Video Format
For example, to select between
1080p1080i
SET
Gain
0dB
6dB18dB
Detail
Studio Camera
OffDefaultLowMediumHigh
Auto Exposure
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
Iris
Shutter
67
Iris + Shutter
/
Micro Studio Camera 4K
Shutter + Iris
/
Micro Studio Camera 4K
Manual Trigger
White Balance
18
250028003000320034003600400045004800K
/
5000520054005600K
60006500K7000K8000K
Shutter Speed
1/501/2000
15
68
Blackmagic Studio Blackmagic Studio Blackmagic Micro
Camera Camera 4K Studio Camera 4K
2160p23.98 2160p29.97
2160p24 2160p30
2160p25
2160p29.97
2160p30
2160p50
2160p59.94
2160p60
Audio
MENU
Blackmagic Studio Camera
SET
69
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
Audio Input
XLR
Microphone Level
Studio Camera
12
Input Level
mic/line
Line Mic LowMic High
1 Ch 1 Input
1
1
2
1
2
Phantom Power
XLR
/ Audio
OnOff
Input LevelsLine
10
Monitoring
MENU
LCD
SET
70
MonitoringBlackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
HDMIHDMI Meters
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4KHDMI
Histgram
/HDMI Overlays
Audio
2
/HDMI Overlays
HDMIHDMI Overlays
Micro Studio Camera 4K On
HDMI Meters HDMI
Brightness
LC D
60
Zebra
Blackmagic Camera100%
Medium
71
Focus Peaking
OffLowMediumHigh
Medium
Studio
MENU
LCD
S E T
Camera Number
ATEMStudio Camera
1-990
72
SDIBlackmagic
3G-SDI Arduino Shield
SDIBlackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino Shield Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino
Shield
Reference Source
Studio CameraSDI
Reference Timing
/
Headset Level
50
50
Program Mix
LCD
Remote
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
S.BusS.Bus
SET
73
LCD
SDI
FOCUS
Studio Camera FOCUS/
FOCUS1 FOCUS2
FOCUS1
IRIS
IRIS1
Video
Film IRIS
Studio Camera
PTT
PTT2
PGM
S D I
LUT
SET
DISPLAY
Studio Camera10
F
Disp
10SDI
74
OPTICAL OUT MENU
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
REF
12V
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT FOCUS IRIS SET PTT PGM LUT
DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRISSET PTT PGM DISPLAY
LUT MENU SET DISPLAY MENU
SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU
Blackmagic Studio Camera10-bit 4:2:2SDI
SFP
ATEM Camera Converter
Blackmagic Studio Camera HDStudio Camera 4KStudio
CameraSDISFP
Blackmagic Studio Camera
3VTR
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
SDI IN
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
REF
SDI IN
REF
12V
12V
SDISFP
Studio Camera
75
Studio CameraSDIBlackmagic HyperDeck Shuttle
SSDSDIHyperDeckSDIStudio CameraSDI
LCD
SDIHyperDeckSDIHyperDeckSDI
Studio CameraSDI
SDIBlackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino ShieldBlackmagic Studio CameraATEM
SDIBlackmagic
BlackmagicD2 - D9
SDIBlackmagic Mini Converter SDI Distribution
BlackmagicBlackmagic8
Blackmagic
GNDArduinoGND
BlackmagicBlackmagic Arduino
Blackmagic
Arduino
1 1 D2
2 2 D3
3 3 D4
4 4 D5
5 5 D6
6 6 D7
7 7 D8
8 8 D9
Blackmagic Arduino12
SDI
PUSH
2
PUSH
Blackmagic Camera Setup
Mac OS X
Blackmagic Camera Setupzip
.dmg Blackmagic Camera Setup
2
PUSH
Windows
Blackmagic Camera Setupzip
Blackmagic Camera Setup
Windows All Programs
Blackmagic DesignBlackmagic Camera
Blackmagic CameraUSB
Mini-B USB 2.0
Blackmagic Camera Setup
Studio CameraLCD
1 Studio Camera6
2 2
LANC
Studio Camera2
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
DaVinci Resolve
ATEMATEMSDI
ATEMSDI
SDI
SDISFP
SDI
1 Blackmagic Studio CameraSDIATEMSDI
2 ATEMSDIMulti ViewStudio
CameraSDIMulti View
SDI
3 Blackmagic Studio CameraMENUStudio Settings > Camera Number
Studio Camera 1ATEM
Cam 1Camera Number1
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1 IN 3 1 1 3 1 REMOTE REMOTE
1 3 5 1 7 3 9 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH
STEREO IN
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
3 1 4 2 OUT
3OUT OUT
4
L R
UT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT IN IN SDI OUT IN
L +12V
R BACKUP L L R R L L R R L R
POWER USB 2.0
OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
ANALOG AUDIO OUTAUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
OUT AUDIO OUT PGM SDI OPTICAL
MICOUT/IN H/PHONE ANALOG AUDIO OUT OP
L R
+12V BACKUP L R L R L R L R
POWER USB 2.0 OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT PGM SDI MIC H/PHONE
ATEM Software Control
/
Aux
AuxAux
On Air
YRGB
DaVinci ResolveYRGB
3
YRGB
/
Blackmagic
/
//
Paste to all
Paste to all
/
/
/
SHIFT
/Maccommand
WindowsCONTROL
SDI
Blackmagic
Studio CameraBlackmagic Studio Camera 4K
1.9.11MFT
dB
DaVinci Resolve
CCU
DaVinci Resolve
//
RGB
YRGB
YRGB
YALTCommand
YRGB
YY
YRGB
RGBDaVinci ResolveYRGB
50
50
180
YRGB100
RGB100
RGBYRGB
ATEMStudio CameraATEMBlackmagic
Studio CameraStudio Camera
Overview
The Blackmagic SDI Camera Control Protocol is used by ATEM switchers, Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino
Shield and Blackmagic Camera Remote to provide Camera Control functionality with supported
Blackmagic Design cameras. Please refer to the Understanding Studio Camera Control chapter
section of this manual, or the ATEM Switchers Manual and SDKmanual for more information. These
can be downloaded at www.blackmagicdesign.com/support.
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni directional stream of small control
messages embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream. Thevideo stream
containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices. Device addressing is used
to allow the sender to specify which device each message is directed to.
Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields are
packed from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are defined as,
and can be assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.
Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active region
of VANC line 16.
Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a maximum
of 255 bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to be sent with a
maximum of one frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single frame,
it should use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritize and send immediately. Lower priority
messages can be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.
The command length is an 8 bit unsigned integer which specifies the length
Command length (uint8) of the included command data. The length does NOT include the length of
the header or any trailing padding bytes.
89
The command id is an 8 bit unsigned integer which indicates themessage
type being sent. Receiving devices should ignore any commands that they
Command id (uint8) do not understand. Commands 0 through 127 are reserved for commands
that apply to multiple types of devices. Commands 128 through 255 are
device specific.
The command data may contain between 0 and 60 bytes of data. The format
Command data(uint8[])
of the data section is defined by the command itself.
Receiving devices should use the destination device address and or the command identifier to
determine which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip irrelevant
or unknown commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.
Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration
The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. Thepacket length is
Data type (uint8) used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each message
must contain an integral number of data elements.
5: UTF-8 string Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number with 5
bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional component.
128: signed 5.11fixed point The fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11.
The representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995
(15 + 2047/2048).
90
Data types 129 through 255 are available for device specific purposes.
The supplied values are assigned to the specified parameter. Each element
will be clamped according to its valid range. A void parameter may only be
0: assign value assigned an empty list of boolean type. This operation will trigger the
action associated with that parameter. A boolean value may be assigned the
value zero for false, and any other value for true.
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to the
current parameter values. The resulting parameter value will be clamped
1: offset / toggle value according to their valid range. It is not valid to apply an offset to a void
value. Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert
that value.
Operation types 128through 255 are available for device specific purposes.
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and
Data (void)
number of elements.
The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.
trigger
.1 Instantaneous autofocus void
instantaneous autofocus
Start/stop zooming at
Set continuous specified rate: -1.0=zoom
.9 fixed16 -1 +1.0
zoom (speed) wider fast, 0.0=stop,
+1=zoom tele fast
91
Group ID Parameter Type Index Minimum Maximum Interpretation
0=progressive,
[3] = interlaced
1=interlaced
[4] =
0=YUV
colour space
Steps through
availableexposure
.6 Exposure (ordinal) int16 0 n
valuesfrom minimum (0)
tomaximum (n)
fps as integer
[0] = file
(eg 24, 25, 30,
frame rate
50, 60, 120)
[0]=file-M-rate
[1]=sensor-M-rate,
valid when sensor-
off-speed-set
[4] = flags
[2]=sensor-off-speed
[3]=interlaced
[4]=windowed mode
0=Manual Trigger,
1=Iris,
.10 Set auto exposure mode int8 0 4 2=Shutter,
3=Iris + Shutter,
4=Shutter + Iris
92
Group ID Parameter Type Index Minimum Maximum Interpretation
0.0=minimum,
.0 Mic level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0.0=minimum,
.1 Headphone level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0.0=minimum,
.2 Headphone program mix fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0.0=minimum,
.3 Speaker level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
Audio
0=internal mic,
1=line level input,
.4 Input type int8 0 2
2=low mic level input,
3=high mic level input
0.0=minimum,
[0] ch0 0 1
1.0=maximum
.5 Input levels fixed16
0.0=minimum,
[1] ch1 0 1
1.0=maximum
true = powered,
.6 Phantom power boolean
false = not powered
0.0=minimum,
.0 Brightness fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0x4 = zebra
Display int16
.1 Overlay enables 0x8 = peaking
bit field
0.0=minimum,
.2 Zebra level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
93
Group ID Parameter Type Index Minimum Maximum Interpretation
0.0=minimum,
.3 Peaking level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0=disable bars,
Color bars display
.4 int8 0 30 1-30=enable bars with
time (seconds)
timeout (s)
0=Red,
.5 Focus Assist int8 1=Green,
[1] = focus
2=Blue,
line color
3=White,
4=Black
0=internal,
Reference .0 Source int8 enum 0 2 1=program,
2=external
BCD -
Confi- s0DDdddddddddddd
guration where s is the sign:
[0] latitude _ _
0=north (+), 1=south (-); DD
degrees, dddddddddddd
decimal degrees
.3 Location int64
BCD -
sDDDdddddddddddd
where s is the sign:
[1] longitude _ _
0=west (-), 1=east (+); DDD
degrees, dddddddddddd
decimal degrees
94
Group ID Parameter Type Index Minimum Maximum Interpretation
10
0 = RAW, 1 = DNxHD,
[0] = basic codec
2 = ProRes
RAW: 0=Uncompressed,
int8
.0 Codec 1=lossy 3:1, 2=lossy 4:1
enum [1] =
codec variant ProRes: 0=HQ, 1=422,
2=LT, 3=Proxy,
4=444, 5=444XQ
0=Preview,
[0] = mode
Media 1=Play, 2=Record
[3] = active
0=CFast card, 1=SD
storage medium
95
Example Protocol Packets
Length
Packet
Operation Byte
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
destination
parameter
command
operation
reserved
category
length
type
trigger instantaneous auto
8 4 4 0 0 0 1 0 0
focus on camera 4
set exposure to 10 ms on
camera 4 (10 ms = 10000 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00
us = 0x00002710)
1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 12 0 0
96
Blackmagic Embedded TallyControl Protocol
Version 1.0 (30/04/14)
This section is for third party developers or anybody who may wish to add support for the Blackmagic
Embedded Tally Control Protocol to their products or system. It describes the protocol for sending
tally information embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream.
Data Flow
A master device such as a broadcast switcher embeds tally information into its program feed which
is broadcast to a number of slave devices such as cameras or camera controllers. The output from
the slave devices is typically fed back to the master device, but may also be sent to a video monitor.
The primary flow of tally information is from the master device to the slaves. Each slave device may
use its device id to extract and display the relevant tally information.
Slave devices pass through the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status, so
that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge
of the device id they are monitoring.
Assumptions
Any data alignment / padding is explicit in the protocol. Bit fields are packed from LSB first.
Blanking Encoding
One tally control packet may be sent per video frame. Packets are encoded as a SMPTE 291M packet
with DID/SDID x51/x52 in the active region of VANC line 15. A tally control packet may contain up to
256 bytes of tally information.
Packet Format
Each tally status consists of 4 bits of information:
uint4
bit 0: program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0x0)
The first byte of the tally packet contains the monitor device tally status and a version number.
Subsequent bytes of the tally packet contain tally status for pairs of slave devices. The master device
sends tally status for the number of devices configured/supported, up to a maximum of 510.
struct tally
uint8
bit 0: monitor device program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: monitor device preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0b00)
bit 4-7: protocol version (0b0000)
97
uint8[0]
bit 0: slave device 1 program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: slave device 1 device preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0b00)
bit 4: slave device 2 program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 5: slave device 2 preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 6-7: reserved (0b00)
uint8[1]
bit 0: slave device 3 program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: slave device 3 device preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0b00)
bit 4: slave device 4 program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 5: slave device 4 preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 6-7: reserved (0b00)
...
Slave Device
(1)
Slave Device
Monitor Device
(3)
3 ...
98
Blackmagic Design
www.blackmagicdesign.com/jp/supportBlackmagic
Design
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Camera
Blackmagic Design
Studio Camera
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design
99
12
Blackmagic Design12
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design
aBlackmagic Design
b
cBlackmagic Design
d
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design
100
Manuel d'utilisation et d'installation
Blackmagic
Studio Cameras
Juin 2017
Franais
Bienvenue
Nous vous remercions d'avoir fait l'acquisition d'une Blackmagic Studio Camera.
Nous avons conu la Blackmagic Studio Camera et la Micro Studio Camera 4K avec beaucoup
d'enthousiasme car j'ai toujours ador la production en direct, et cela depuis mon adolescence.
Dans le pass, les camras pourvues des fonctions tally et rseau d'ordres taient trs onreuses
et trs grandes, donc difficiles grer. Nous souhaitions vraiment remdier ce problme en crant
une camra plus compacte incluant des fonctionnalits telles que le rseau d'ordres, le tally et le
contrle de la camra qui sont normalement offertes par des camras de plus grande taille.
C'est la raison pour laquelle nous avons dvelopp la Blackmagic Studio Camera. Nous dsirions
crer une camra beaucoup plus petite pour des raisons de portabilit, cependant les petites
camras sont gnralement dotes de tous petits crans. C'est ce que nous voulions viter. Ce que
nous recherchions, c'tait un viseur beaucoup plus grand ! Et voil le rsultat : la Blackmagic Studio
Camera est une petite camra broadcast dote d'un trs grand viseur, qui est un vrai plaisir utiliser.
Il est trs facile de raliser une mise au point et un cadrage prcis avec un viseur de cette taille.
Il va sans dire que vous bnficiez galement d'indicateurs tally et du rseau d'ordres, sans oublier
une camra d'excellente qualit quipe d'une monture d'objectif Micro 4/3 flexible. C'est tout
ce dont vous avez besoin dans un seul produit ! Vous pouvez brancher des microphones munis
de bonnettes anti-vent mme si ces derniers ncessitent une alimentation fantme. Vous pouvez
galement ajouter un module SFP pour disposer d'une connexion fibre optique lorsque vous devez
placer votre camra des kilomtres de votre mlangeur. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez mme
ajouter un HyperDeck Shuttle et utiliser la camra pour la production gnrale.
Malgr sa petite taille, la Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K repousse les limites fixes par
la Blackmagic Studio Camera ! Cette petite camra allie un capteur Ultra HD incroyable de
nombreuses fonctionnalits de contrle distance. Vous tes dsormais en mesure de capturer des
images de qualit professionnelle et de contrler la camra grce un mlangeur ATEM ou votre
propre systme de contrle distance.
Nous esprons que vous allez utiliser votre nouvelle camra pour crer des productions en direct
exceptionnelles et produire des travaux au rendu remarquable ! Nous nous rjouissons de dcouvrir
vos ambitieux projets !
Grant Petty
PDG de Blackmagic Design
Sommaire
Blackmagic Studio Camera
Sommaire
Mise en route
Monter un objectif
Pour mettre en route votre Blackmagic Studio Camera ou Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K,
ilvous suffit de monter un objectif et d'allumer la camra. Pour retirer le cache de protection de la
monture d'objectif, maintenez le bouton de verrouillage enfonc et tournez le cache dans le sens
inverse des aiguilles d'une montre jusqu' ce qu'il soit libr. Nous vous recommandons d'teindre
systmatiquement votre camra Blackmagic avant de monter ou de retirer un objectif.
Pour monter un objectif :
1 Alignez le point situ sur votre objectif avec celui de la monture. De nombreux objectifs
possdent un point bleu, rouge ou blanc ou un autre indicateur.
2 Tournez l'objectif dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre jusqu' ce qu'il s'embote correctement.
3 Pour retirer l'objectif, maintenez le bouton de verrouillage enfonc et tournez l'objectif dans
le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre jusqu' ce que le point atteigne la position de
midi puis retirez-le dlicatement.
Afin d'viter d'exposer le botier la poussire lorsqu'aucun objectif n'est mont, il est vivement
conseill de garder le cache anti-poussire autant que possible.
1 1
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
2 2
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
SDI IN
REF
REF
12V
12V
Connexion un mlangeur
La Blackmagic Studio Camera et la Micro Studio Camera 4K peuvent tre contrles distance via
SDI partir d'un mlangeur ATEM. Vous disposez ainsi d'un contrle de camra rapide et interactif
durant la production en direct.
CONSEIL Si le module optique SFP en option est install, vous pouvez utiliser un
cble fibre optique pour connecter la Blackmagic Studio Camera un mlangeur
ATEM. C'est la solution idale si vous avez besoin de longs cbles car la fibre optique
peut acheminer le signal sur 45 kilomtres.
Il est alors ncessaire de connecter un ATEM Studio Converter ou un ATEM Talkback
Converter au mlangeur ATEM. Pour plus d'information sur les installations fibre
optique, consultez la section Schmas de connexion du manuel ATEM Converters.
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
Pour connecter la camra un mlangeur ATEM, il suffit de brancher la sortie SDI de la camra n'importe
quelle entre SDI du mlangeur. Pour contrler la camra, connectez n'importe quelle sortie non down-
convertie du mlangeur ATEM l'entre programme SDI de votre camra. Une faon rapide de brancher le
mlangeur la camra est de connecter une des sorties programme du mlangeur.
2
3
4
1
PUSH
5 2
PUSH
Face gauche
2 Contrle distance LANC
Le jack stro de 2,5mm pour le contrle distance LANC prend en charge le contrle du
diaphragme, du zoom et de la mise au point.
3 Casque d'aviation
Connecteur TRS de 0,25 pour le contrle du programme et du son en rgie par le biais
d'un casque d'aviation.
4 Entre pour le micro du casque
Connecteur TRS de 0,206 pour communiquer avec la rgie au moyen d'un casque
d'aviation.
5 Entres audio
Deux connecteurs XLR symtriques de 1/4 pour le signal audio.
Pour plus d'information, consultez la section Blackmagic Studio Camera - Face gauche
de ce manuel.
12
11
6 OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
7 SDI OUT
8 SDI IN
9 REF
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 18 20 21 22 10 12V
Face arrire
11 Ecran LCD 10
Contrlez le signal de la camra en direct ou le signal du programme, ou visualisez
le menu. Pour plus d'information, consultez la section Paramtres du menu Monitoring
de ce manuel.
12 Voyant tally arrire
Lorsqu'il est allum, il indique au cameraman que la camra est l'antenne.
13 Bouton Focus
Appuyez une fois pour une mise au point automatique ou deux fois pour afficher le focus
peaking sur l'cran LCD.
14 Bouton Iris
Appuyez une fois pour un rglage automatique de l'exposition.
15 Bouton PTT
Appuyez et maintenez le bouton ENFONC pour parler. Appuyez deux fois rapidement
pour une communication mains libres. Appuyez nouveau pour revenir la configuration
par dfaut.
16 Bouton PGM
Il vous suffit d'appuyer sur le bouton PGM pour basculer entre le signal en direct de la
camra et le signal du programme provenant de la rgie o se trouve le mlangeur.
17 Bouton LUT
Cette fonction n'est pas disponible actuellement.
18 Boutons de navigation
Naviguez sur le menu affich sur l'cran LCD.
REF
Utilisez ce bouton pour confirmer les slections faites dans les menus.
SDI OUT
20 Bouton Display
OPTICAL IN
Appuyez sur ce bouton pour activer ou dsactiver les informations affiches l'cran.
OPTICAL OUT
21 Bouton Menu
Accdez au menu sur l'cran LCD.
22 Bouton de mise en marche
Appuyez sur ce bouton pour allumer la Blackmagic Studio Camera. Appuyez sur le bouton
et maintenez-le enfonc pour teindre la camra.
Pour plus d'information, consultez la section Paramtres des boutons de ce manuel.
Face infrieure
23 Connecteur USB
Port USB Mini-B pour les mises jour du firmware de la camra. Pour plus d'information,
consultez la section Blackmagic Camera Setup de ce manuel.
23
1 2 4
5
6
PUSH
7
3
2
8
PUSH
Face droite
9 Entre audio analogique
Entre audio stro de 3,5mm. Commutable entre les entres de niveau micro et de niveau
ligne partir du menu.
10 Sortie SDI
Sortie SDI permettant de connecter des appareils tels que des mlangeurs,
desenregistreurs externes ou d'autres appareils.
11 Entre SDI
L'entre SDI offre un contrle de la camra via un mlangeur ATEM ou la Blackmagic
3G-SDI Arduino Shield.
12 Casque / Rseau d'ordres
Jack de 3,5mm compatible avec les micros-casques iPhone et Android pour le rseau
dordres. Appuyez deux fois sur le bouton lecture/pause du micro-casque pour basculer
vers le rseau d'ordres. Appuyez une nouvelle fois pour teindre la connexion.
10
13
11
12
Face suprieure
14 Bouton d'jection de la batterie
Faites glisser ce bouton pour jecter la batterie.
Face infrieure
15 Connecteur USB
Port USB pour les mises jour du firmware de la camra. Pour plus d'information,
consultezla section Blackmagic Camera Setup de ce manuel.
14
15
Connexions de la camra
Blackmagic Studio Camera - Ct gauche
Contrle distance LANC
Le port LANC de votre camra permet de contrler distance la mise au point de l'objectif, l'iris et le
zoom lorsque vous utilisez un objectif compatible. Le port fonctionne avec un jack stro de 2,5 mm
qui prend en charge le protocole LANC.
Les objectifs Micro 4/3 actifs vous permettent de contrler le servomcanisme du zoom l'aide du
contrle distance LANC. Les objectifs suivants sont pris en charge :
Objectif Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 Power O.I.S.
Objectif Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 45-175mm f/4.0-5.6 Zoom O.I.S.
Objectif Olympus M.Zuiko Digital ED 12-50mm f/3.5-6.3 EZ Micro 4/3
Objectif Olympus M.Zuiko Digital ED 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 EZ Micro 4/3
Sortie Casque
Permet de contrler le programme et le son en rgie au moyen d'un casque d'aviation muni de
connecteurs de type fixed wing . La gamme de casques d'aviation est tendue, elle part de
modles d'oreillettes pour une utilisation dans les studios jusqu'aux casques rduction de bruit de
taille normale qui conviennent aux concerts et vnements sportifs. L'audio est achemin partir
des canaux 15 et 16 du signal vido SDI entrant. Les canaux 15 et 16 sont rarement utiliss durant la
production et sont donc appropris une utilisation pour le rseau d'ordres.
Entres audio
2 canaux d'audio symtrique analogique professionnelle sont pris en charge par les connecteurs
XLR. Configurez les niveaux d'entre de chaque canal l'aide du menu audio. Les entres prennent
en charge les signaux de niveau micro ainsi que les signaux de niveau ligne. Le type de signal est
galement slectionnable partir du menu audio. Le son est intgr aux canaux 1 et 2 du flux SDI.
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
Sortie SDI
Utilisez la sortie SDI pour acheminer de la vido 4:2:2 10 bits du matriel vido SDI professionnel
tel que des grilles de commutation, moniteurs, priphriques de capture SDI et mlangeurs
broadcast. La Blackmagic Studio Camera HD prend en charge les signaux 3G-SDI et la Studio
Camera 4K les signaux 12G-SDI.
Entre SDI
L'entre SDI permet au cameraman de visualiser le signal de sortie du programme (PGM). Il vous
suffit d'appuyer sur le bouton PGM pour basculer entre le signal en direct de la camra et le signal
du programme provenant de la rgie o se trouve le mlangeur.
Si les entres optiques et SDI sont toutes deux connectes, le signal de sortie provenant de
l'appareil qui a t connect en premier sera utilis. Si vous utilisez la Studio Camera pour
enregistrer sur un appareil tel que le Blackmagic Hyperdeck Shuttle, la sortie de l'Hyperdeck peut
tre connecte l'entre SDI pour vous permettre de lire ce que vous venez d'enregistrer.
Alimentation
Utilisez l'entre 12 - 24V pour connecter votre source d'alimentation et charger la batterie interne de
la Blackmagic Studio Camera HD et de la Blackmagic Studio Camera 4K. Une fois la batterie
charge, elle alimentera la Studio Camera HD pour une dure de 4 heures, et la Studio Camera 4K
pour une dure de 3 heures.
La Blackmagic Studio Camera 2 et la Studio Camera 4K 2 ne possdent pas de batterie interne.
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
REF
12V
MENU
EXPANSION
SET
Sortie SDI
Utilisez la sortie SDI pour acheminer de la vido 4:2:2 10 bits du matriel vido SDI professionnel tel
que des grilles de commutation, moniteurs, priphriques de capture SDI et mlangeurs broadcast.
La Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K prend en charge le 6G-SDI. Vous aurez besoin d'un cble
adaptateur DIN 1.0/2.3 vers SDI pour connecter la camra des connecteurs SDI de taille standard.
Entre SDI
Utilisez l'entre SDI pour contrler la Micro Studio Camera 4K laide dun mlangeur ATEM.
Pourplus d'information sur les fonctions de contrle disponibles, consultez la section Fonction
Camera Control de ce manuel.
CONSEIL Vous pouvez galement contrler la Micro Studio Camera avec une Blackmagic
3G-SDI Arduino Shield. La carte intgre les mmes paquets de donnes Blackmagic au
signal SDI que le mlangeur ATEM. Ainsi, en connectant le flux du programme de n'importe
quel mlangeur SDI l'entre SDI de la camra via cette carte, vous aurez accs la
fonction de contrle pour camra de Blackmagic, comme avec un mlangeur ATEM.
Personnalisation
Cble expansion de la Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
Il existe deux faons d'accder aux fonctionnalits du port expansion. Vous pouvez utiliser le cble
expansion vendu avec la Micro Studio Camera 4K ou personnaliser vos propres cbles.
Le cble expansion est dot de connecteurs permettant de contrler les options suivantes.
4 Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable
1 Entre d'alimentation
L'entre d'alimentation de 12V de la camra fonctionne avec un jack DC. Ce cble permet
dalimenter la Micro Studio Camera 4K et d'effectuer une charge lente de la batterie lorsque
celle-ci est fixe la camra. Lorsque l'alimentation externe est utilise, la camra s'allume
automatiquement.
2 Entre de rfrence
Cette entre permet plusieurs camras d'tre synchronises un signal de rfrence
blackburst ou tri-level. Le fait de synchroniser des camras un signal de rfrence externe
prvient les erreurs de timing qui peuvent provoquer un saut de l'image au cours de la
commutation entre diffrentes camras.
3 LANC
Connectez un jack de 2,5mm des tlcommandes LANC pour contrler les nombreuses
fonctionnalits de la camra, telles que le zoom, le rglage de l'iris et la mise au point,
avecun bras fix au trpied lorsqu'un objectif compatible est utilis.
4 Commandes PTZ
Le connecteur RS-422 est utilis pour envoyer les commandes PTZ reues par le signal SDI
de la Micro Studio Camera 4K vers une tte motorise.
Personnalisation 113
5 Communication B4
Le connecteur DB-9 vous permet d'alimenter et de contrler les objectifs broadcast
B4 monts sur la Micro Studio Camera 4K l'aide d'un adaptateur Micro 4/3 vers B4.
Pourcontrler un objectif B4 compatible, il suffit de connecter le cble Digital B4 Control
Adapter en option au cble de l'objectif, puis de connecter l'autre extrmit au connecteur
srie DB-9 du cble expansion.
Vous pouvez rgler diffrents paramtres, tels que l'iris, la mise au point et le zoom de la
mme faon que sur un objectif Micro 4/3 actif. Le contrle peut tre effectu via un
mlangeur ATEM partir de la page Camera Control ou partir dune interface de
contrle distance connecte au cble expansion de la Micro Studio Camera 4K. Pour une
liste complte des objectifs numriques B4 pris en charge, veuillez consulter la page
d'assistance de Blackmagic Design www.blackmagicdesign.com/fr/support/faq/59011.
6 Servo numrique S.Bus
En connectant la camra un rcepteur S.Bus compatible avec un cble Futaba J,
vousdisposez de 18 canaux S.Bus. Ces canaux peuvent tre assigns des fonctionnalits
de la camra (la mise au point, le zoom motoris, le contrle de l'iris et autres) et ainsi tre
contrls distance. Pour obtenir plus d'informations sur l'assignation de fonctionnalits aux
canaux S.Bus, consultez la section Paramtres du menu Remote de ce manuel.
P1 PIN ASSIGNMENT
2 S. Bus 1
2 P2
GROUND 3
GROUND 1
12 PTZ RS422 Rx- 2
8 PTZ RS422 Tx+ 3 5
9
GROUND 4 4
GROUND
5
6
3
2
8
7 P3
6
13 PTZ RS422 Rx+ 7 1
5 15
GROUND 1
10 14 B4 Lens Control Transmit 2 5
9
4 14 4
15 B4 Lens Control Receive 3
P4
9 8
3 13 3
8 GROUND 4 2
7
2
7
12 6 Power +12V in* 5 1
6
1 11 OTHER
6
* Power input to the camera is also used to power the lens. Beware of applying excessive voltages if youre using
your own power supply to avoid damage to the lens.
Personnalisation 114
Menu Paramtres
Les paramtres de la camra Blackmagic peuvent tre modifis pour capturer une image
dexcellente qualit. Vous pouvez notamment changer le format vido, la vitesse d'obturation,
labalance des blancs, les niveaux audio, le monitoring, le tally ainsi que le rseau d'ordres pour une
communication efficace avec la rgie.
Cette section contient des informations relatives aux paramtres de votre camra.
2160p23.98 2160p29.97
2160p24 2160p30
2160p25
2160p29.97
2160p30
2160p50
2160p59.94
2160p60
Audio Input
Fait basculer l'audio entre le microphone interne de la camra et les connecteurs audio XLR.
HDMI Meters
La Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K vous permet de choisir les outils de mesure que vous
souhaitez afficher sur la sortie HDMI.
Histogramme
Il affiche la distribution des hautes et des basses lumires sur un axe horizontal. Le ct gauche de
l'histogramme reprsente les basses lumires, ou les noirs, et le ct droit reprsente les hautes
lumires, ou les blancs. Lorsque vous ouvrez ou fermez l'ouverture de l'objectif, la distribution des
informations sur l'histogramme change en consquence vers la gauche ou vers la droite.
Ce paramtre active et dsactive l'histogramme. Lorsque ce paramtre et le paramtre HDMI
Overlays sont activs, lhistogramme apparat en bas droite du moniteur connect.
Audio
Les vumtres affichent le volume des canaux audio gauche et droit sur deux barres horizontales.
Lecanal gauche est situ au-dessus, le droit en dessous. Si le niveau audio est trop lev,
uncrtage se produit et provoque un son distordu. Pour viter cela, ajustez le gain audio sur votre
camra jusqu' ce que les niveaux audio restent dans la plage approprie.
Ce paramtre active et dsactive les vumtres. Lorsque ce paramtre et le paramtre HDMI
Overlays sont activs, ils apparaissent en bas gauche du moniteur connect.
HDMI Overlays
Ce paramtre est seulement disponible sur la Micro Studio Camera 4K. Lorsqu'il est rgl sur On,
lasortie vido HDMI inclut les repres de cadrage, des informations concernant les paramtres et le
nom de la camra ainsi que tous les outils de mesure qui ont t activs via le paramtre
HDMI Meters.
Luminosit (Brightness)
Dplacez le curseur vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour ajuster les paramtres de luminosit de
l'cran LCD. Par dfaut, ce paramtre est rgl sur 60%.
Paramtre Zebra
Les Blackmagic Cameras possdent une fonction zebra qui vous indique les niveaux d'exposition.
Des lignes diagonales apparatront sur n'importe quelle zone de la vido qui excde le niveau
d'exposition zebra.
Activez la fonction zebra et slectionnez le niveau d'alerte zebra souhait l'aide des flches
gauche et droite. Par dfaut, ce paramtre est rgl sur Medium.
Paramtres supplmentaires
Bouton PTT (Appuyer pour parler)
Lors de la production en direct, il est primordial que les oprateurs puissent communiquer avec le
ralisateur et les personnes se trouvant en rgie. Il vous suffit d'appuyer et de maintenir le bouton
enfonc et vous pouvez ensuite commencer parler. Appuyez deux fois rapidement pour une
communication mains libres. Appuyez nouveau pour revenir la configuration par dfaut.
Bouton Programme (PMG)
Parfois, il est important que les oprateurs puissent visualiser le signal du programme au lieu du signal
de leur propre camra. Il vous suffit d'appuyer sur le bouton PGM pour basculer entre le signal en direct
de la camra et le signal du programme provenant de la rgie o se trouve le mlangeur. Vous pouvez
utiliser l'entre SDI ou l'entre fibre optique en option pour connecter votre source vido externe.
Bouton LUT
Fonction non disponible actuellement.
Flches vers le haut, le bas, la gauche ou la droite
Utilisez ces boutons pour naviguer sur les menus.
Bouton Set
Utilisez ce bouton pour confirmer les slections faites dans les menus.
Bouton Disp
Appuyez sur ce bouton pour afficher des informations importantes sur le moniteur de 10" de la
Studio Camera, notamment :
Les repres de cadrage contenant les paramtres de la camra et de l'objectif, tels que le
numro de la camra, le format vido et la frquence d'images, la vitesse d'obturation, la
balance des blancs, l'autonomie de la batterie, les paramtres de gain et l'ouverture.
Appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton Disp pour masquer les informations l'cran et visionner l'image
uniquement. Les informations l'cran sont visibles sur l'cran de 10". La sortie SDI est toujours propre.
Appuyez sur le bouton de mise en marche pour allumer la Blackmagic Studio Camera. Appuyez sur
SDI IN le bouton et maintenez-le enfonc pour teindre la camra.
REF
12V
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT FOCUS IRIS SET PTT PGM LUT
DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRISSET PTT PGM DISPLAY
LUT MENU SET DISPLAY MENU
SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU
Pour slectionner la mise au point Appuyez sur le bouton Iris pour La Studio Camera dispose de
automatique, appuyez une fois sur une exposition automatique ou paramtres essentiels pour la
le bouton Focus. Pour activer le utilisez les boutons de navigation production en direct, tels que
focus peaking, appuyez deux fois flches vers le bas ou vers le haut PTT et PGM.
rapidement sur le bouton Focus. pour une exposition manuelle.
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
SDI IN
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
REF
SDI IN
REF
12V
12V
1 1 D2
2 2 D3
3 3 D4
4 4 D5
5 5 D6
6 6 D7
7 7 D8
8 8 D9
L'exemple de sketch ci-dessous indique comment l Blackmagic Arduino Shield est programme pour
dtecter un signal tally sur les entres 1 et 2 via la sortie tally du mlangeur. Ce signal tally est ensuite intgr
la sortie SDI de la carte extension. Le voyant tally de la camra correspondante s'allume.
PUSH
2
1
PUSH
Aprs avoir tlcharg le logiciel Blackmagic Camera Setup et dzipp le fichier tlcharg,
lafentre Blackmagic Camera Setup devrait safficher pour vous permettre d'installer l'utilitaire.
Double-cliquez sur l'icne d'installation et suivez les instructions affiches lcran pour terminer
linstallation.
Une fois l'installation termine, cliquez sur le menu Dmarrer et allez sur Tous les programmes.
Cliquez sur le dossier Blackmagic Design pour ouvrir le logiciel Blackmagic Camera Setup et le
manuel d'utilisation.
Autres accessoires
Pour les productions en studio, vous pouvez avoir besoin de monter la camra sur un support et
d'utiliser des rails pour les gros objectifs broadcast et les prompteurs. Pour la production en plein air,
vous prfrerez peut-tre utiliser des micros, des batteries externes ou des contrleurs distance
LANC. La camra dispose de deux pas de vis de 3/8 sur la face infrieure, et de dix pas de vis de
1/4 sur les cts et la face suprieure. Cela signifie que vous avez la flexibilit de configurer votre
matriel pour n'importe quel type de production.
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1 IN 3 1 1 3 1 REMOTE REMOTE
1 3 5 1 7 3 9 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH
STEREO IN
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
Connectez votre Blackmagic Studio Camera n'importe quelle entre SDI du mlangeur ATEM.
3 1 4 2 OUT
3OUT OUT
4
L R
UT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT IN IN SDI OUT IN
L +12V
R BACKUP L L R R L L R R L R
POWER USB 2.0
OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
ANALOG AUDIO OUTAUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
OUT AUDIO OUT PGM SDI OPTICAL
MICOUT/IN H/PHONE ANALOG AUDIO OUT OP
L R
+12V BACKUP L R L R L R L R
POWER USB 2.0 OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT PGM SDI MIC H/PHONE
Connectez plusieurs Blackmagic Studio Camera via fibre optique au moyen d'un ATEM Studio Converter.
Roues chromatiques
La roue chromatique est une fonctionnalit puissante du correcteur de couleurs DaVinci Resolve et
permet d'effectuer des ajustements de couleur pour les paramtres Lift, Gamma et Gain de chaque
canal YRGB. Pour slectionner le paramtre ajuster, il vous suffit de cliquer sur un des trois
boutons de slection situs au-dessus de la roue chromatique.
Roue matresse
Utilisez la roue matresse situe sous la roue chromatique pour effectuer des ajustements de
contraste sur tous les canaux YRGB en mme temps, ou uniquement de luminance pour les
paramtres lift, gamma ou gain.
Dtails
Ce paramtre permet de rgler la nettet de l'image en direct des camras. Rduisez ou augmentez
le niveau de nettet en slectionnant : Dsactiver les dtails, Dtails par dfaut pour une nettet
faible, Dtails moyens et Dtails levs.
Boutons de rinitialisation
Le bouton de rinitialisation situ en bas droite de la fentre de contrle de la camra vous permet
de choisir aisment les paramtres de correction colorimtrique que vous souhaitez rinitialiser,
copier ou coller. Chaque roue chromatique possde galement son propre bouton de rinitialisation.
Appuyez sur ce bouton pour restaurer le paramtre par dfaut, ou pour copier/coller un paramtre.
Les fentres de contrle de camra verrouilles ne sont pas affectes par la fonction Coller.
Le bouton de rinitialisation principal est situ en bas droite de la fentre de correction
colorimtrique. Il vous permet de rinitialiser les roues chromatiques Lift, Gamma et Gain ainsi que
les paramtres Contraste, Teinte, Saturation et Lum Mix. Vous pouvez coller les paramtres de
correction colorimtrique des fentres de contrle de camra individuelles ou toutes les fentres
en mme temps pour crer un rendu uniforme. Les paramtres relatifs l'iris, la mise au point et au
niveau de noir ainsi que le paramtre Limite ne sont pas affects par la fonction Coller. Lorsque vous
souhaitez appliquer la fonction Coller tout, un message apparat pour vous demander de confirmer
votre action. De cette faon, vous ne collez pas de nouveaux paramtres accidentellement aux
camras non verrouilles en cours de diffusion.
Pour ouvrir ou fermer l'iris, dplacez le bouton vers le haut ou vers le bas. En maintenant la touche
SHIFT enfonce, vous pouvez ajuster uniquement l'iris.
Pour assombrir ou claircir le niveau de noir, dplacez le bouton vers la gauche ou vers la droite.
Enmaintenant la touche Command (Mac) ou Control (Windows) enfonce, vous pourrez ajuster
uniquement le niveau de noir.
Contrle du zoom
Lorsque vous utilisez des objectifs compatibles dots d'un zoom lectronique, vous pouvez
effectuer des zooms avant et arrire l'aide de la fonction de contrle du zoom. Cette fonction
fonctionne de la mme manire que la bague de zoom sur un objectif, avec le tlobjectif d'un ct
et le grand-angle de l'autre. Cliquez sur le contrle du zoom situ au-dessus du curseur Limite,
etdplacez-le vers le haut pour faire un zoom avant ou vers le bas pour faire un zoom arrire.
Si votre objectif ne dispose pas d'un contrle actif de l'objectif ou si votre camra ne prend pas en
charge le contrle du zoom via le protocole SDI de contrle de camra, alors ces paramtres
n'auront aucune incidence. Si vous utilisez une Blackmagic Studio Camera ou Blackmagic Studio
Camera 4K, assurez-vous que la mise jour logicielle v1.9.11 ou ultrieure est installe afin de
bnficier du contrle d'objectif Micro 4/3 avec zoom actif.
Paramtre Limite
Le paramtre Coarse est situ gauche du contrle de l'iris/niveau de noir et permet de limiter
l'ouverture de l'iris. Cette fonctionnalit vous aide ne pas faire passer des images surexposes
l'antenne.
Pour configurer cette limite, ouvrez compltement l'iris l'aide de la fonction de contrle de l'iris,
puis dplacez le curseur vers le haut ou vers le bas pour configurer l'exposition optimale. prsent,
lorsque vous ajustez l'iris, la limite que vous avez configure l'aide du paramtre Limite
l'empchera de dpasser l'exposition optimale.
Indicateur de l'iris
L'indicateur de l'iris est situ droite du contrle de l'iris/niveau de noir et fait office de rfrence
visuelle vous permettant de visualiser l'ouverture de lentille. L'indicateur de l'iris est affect par le
paramtre Limite.
Cliquez sur le bouton de mise au point automatique ou dplacez le curseur de mise au point
manuelle vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour effectuer la mise au point d'un objectif compatible.
Gain de la camra
Le paramtre relatif au gain de la camra vous permet d'ajouter du gain supplmentaire votre
camra. C'est trs important lorsque vous travaillez dans des conditions o la lumire est minime et
que vous avez besoin de gain supplmentaire au niveau du capteur pour viter que vos images ne
soient sous-exposes. Vous pouvez rduire ou augmenter le gain en cliquant sur les flches gauche
ou droite situes ct du paramtre gain (dB).
Il est possible d'ajouter du gain tout moment, par exemple lorsque la lumire baisse au coucher du
soleil lors d'un tournage en extrieur et qu'il vous faut augmenter la luminosit de votre image. Il faut
bien garder l'esprit que le fait d'ajouter du gain augmentera le bruit dans vos images.
Roues chromatiques
Les commandes Lift/Gamma/Gain permettent de contrler des zones en fonction de leurs tons,
mme si elles se chevauchent. En photographie, les termes lift, gamma et gain correspondent aux
basses lumires, tons moyens et hautes lumires.
Utilisez les roues chromatiques de l'une ou l'autre des faons dcrites ci-aprs pour effectuer des
ajustements minutieux ou extrmes :
Cliquez et dplacez-vous n'importe o dans le cercle de couleur : Notez qu'il n'est
pas ncessaire de positionner votre pointeur sur l'indicateur de la balance des couleurs.
Lorsque l'indicateur de la balance des couleurs se dplace, les paramtres RGB situs sous
la roue chromatique se modifient pour reflter les ajustements apports chaque canal.
Cliquez en maintenant le bouton SHIFT enfonc et dplacez-vous n'importe o dans
le cercle de couleur : L'indicateur de la balance des couleurs se positionnera l'endroit
mme o se trouve le pointeur, ce qui vous permet de faire des ajustements plus rapides
et extrmes.
Double-cliquez n'importe o dans le cercle de couleur : Rinitialise l'ajustement apport la
couleur sans rinitialiser l'ajustement apport la roue matresse pour la commande en question.
Cliquez sur la commande de rinitialisation situe en haut droite du cercle de
couleur : Rinitialise le contrle de la balance des couleurs ainsi que la roue matresse
correspondante.
Roues matresses
Utilisez les roues matresses situes sous les roues chromatiques pour ajuster les commandes Lift,
Gamma et Gain de chaque canal YRGB.
Ajustez les roues matresses en dplaant la commande vers la gauche ou vers la droite.
Paramtre Contraste
Le paramtre Contraste vous permet de contrler la distance entre les valeurs les plus sombres et
les plus claires d'une image. L'effet ressemble celui effectu lorsque vous utilisez les roues
matresses Lift et Gain. Par dfaut, ce paramtre est rgl sur 50 %.
Paramtre Saturation
Le paramtre Saturation augmente ou rduit la quantit de couleur de l'image. Par dfaut,
ceparamtre est rgl sur 50 %.
Paramtre Teinte
Le paramtre Teinte fait tourner toutes les teintes de l'image sur le primtre complet de la roue
chromatique. Le paramtre par dfaut de 180 degrs affiche la distribution originale des teintes.
L'augmentation ou la diminution de cette valeur fait tourner toutes les teintes vers l'avant ou vers
l'arrire selon la distribution des teintes d'une roue chromatique.
Overview
The Blackmagic SDI Camera Control Protocol is used by ATEM switchers, Blackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino Shield and Blackmagic Camera Remote to provide Camera Control functionality with
supported Blackmagic Design cameras. Please refer to the Understanding Studio Camera Control
chapter section of this manual, or the ATEM Switchers Manual and SDKmanual for more information.
These can be downloaded at www.blackmagicdesign.com/support.
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni directional stream of small control
messages embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream. Thevideo stream
containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices. Device addressing is used
to allow the sender to specify which device each message is directed to.
Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields are
packed from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are defined as,
and can be assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.
Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active region
of VANC line 16.
Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a maximum
of 255 bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to be sent with a
maximum of one frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single frame,
it should use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritize and send immediately. Lower priority
messages can be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.
Receiving devices should use the destination device address and or the command identifier to
determine which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip
irrelevant or unknown commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.
Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration
The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. Thepacket length is
Data type (uint8) used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each message
must contain an integral number of data elements.
5: UTF-8 string Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number with
5 bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional component.
128: signed 5.11fixed point The fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11.
The representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995
(15 + 2047/2048).
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to the
current parameter values. The resulting parameter value will be clamped
1: offset / toggle value according to their valid range. It is not valid to apply an offset to a void
value. Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert
that value.
Operation types 128through 255 are available for device specific purposes.
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and
Data (void)
number of elements.
The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.
0
.0 Focus fixed16 0 1 0.0=near, 1.0=far
trigger
.1 Instantaneous autofocus void
instantaneous autofocus
Aperture Value (where
.2 Aperture (f-stop) fixed16 -1 16
fnumber = sqrt(2^AV))
.3 Aperture (normalised) fixed16 0 1 0.0=smallest, 1.0=largest
Steps through available
aperture values from
.4 Aperture (ordinal) int16 0 n
minimum (0) to
maximum (n)
Instantaneous trigger instantaneous
.5 void
Lens auto aperture auto aperture
Optical image true=enabled,
.6 boolean
stabilisation false=disabled
Move to specified focal
length in mm, from
.7 Set absolute zoom (mm) int16 0 max
minimum (0) to
maximum (max)
Set absolute zoom Move to specified focal
.8 fixed16 0 1
(normalised) length: 0.0=wide, 1.0=tele
Start/stop zooming at
Set continuous specified rate: -1.0=zoom
.9 fixed16 -1 +1.0
zoom (speed) wider fast, 0.0=stop,
+1=zoom tele fast
Length
Packet
Operation Byte
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
destination
parameter
command
operation
reserved
category
length
type
trigger instantaneous auto
8 4 4 0 0 0 1 0 0
focus on camera 4
set exposure to 10 ms on
camera 4 (10 ms = 10000 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00
us = 0x00002710)
1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 12 0 0
Data Flow
A master device such as a broadcast switcher embeds tally information into its program feed which
is broadcast to a number of slave devices such as cameras or camera controllers. The output from
the slave devices is typically fed back to the master device, but may also be sent to a video monitor.
The primary flow of tally information is from the master device to the slaves. Each slave device may
use its device id to extract and display the relevant tally information.
Slave devices pass through the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status, so
that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge
of the device id they are monitoring.
Assumptions
Any data alignment / padding is explicit in the protocol. Bit fields are packed from LSB first.
Blanking Encoding
One tally control packet may be sent per video frame. Packets are encoded as a SMPTE 291M
packet with DID/SDID x51/x52 in the active region of VANC line 15. A tally control packet may contain
up to 256 bytes of tally information.
Packet Format
Each tally status consists of 4 bits of information:
uint4
bit 0: program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0x0)
The first byte of the tally packet contains the monitor device tally status and a version number.
Subsequent bytes of the tally packet contain tally status for pairs of slave devices. The master device
sends tally status for the number of devices configured/supported, up to a maximum of 510.
struct tally
uint8
bit 0: monitor device program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: monitor device preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0b00)
bit 4-7: protocol version (0b0000)
Slave Device
(1)
Slave Device
Monitor Device
(3)
3 ...
Remplacement de la batterie
La batterie intgre de la Studio Camera nest pas rparable par lutilisateur. Si la batterie doit tre
remplace, vous devrez lexpdier au centre dassistance Blackmagic Design le plus proche. Si la
camra nest plus couverte par la garantie, le remplacement de la batterie se fera moyennant des
frais de services minimaux pour le cot de la batterie, le travail ralis et la rexpdition de votre
camra. Veuillez contacter le service dassistance de Blackmagic Design pour de plus amples
informations sur lexpdition de votre camra, comment l'emballer en toute scurit et les frais de
remplacement de la batterie dans votre pays.
Assistance 147
Garantie
Garantie limite 12 mois
Par la prsente, Blackmagic Design garantit que ce produit sera exempt de dfauts matriels et de
fabrication pendant une dure de un an compter de la date d'achat. Si un produit savre
dfectueux pendant la priode de garantie, Blackmagic Design peut, sa seule discrtion, rparer
le produit dfectueux sans frais pour les pices et la main-duvre, ou le remplacer.
Pour se prvaloir du service offert en vertu de la prsente garantie, il vous incombe dinformer
Blackmagic Design de lexistence du dfaut avant expiration de la priode de garantie, et de
prendre les mesures ncessaires pour lexcution des dispositions de ce service. Le consommateur
a la responsabilit de soccuper de lemballage et de l'expdition du produit dfectueux au centre
de service nommment dsign par Blackmagic Design, en frais de port prpay. Il incombe au
consommateur de payer tous les frais de transport, dassurance, droits de douane et taxes et toutes
autres charges relatives aux produits qui nous auront t retourns, et ce quelle que soit la raison.
La prsente garantie ne saurait en aucun cas sappliquer des dfauts, pannes ou dommages
causs par une utilisation inapproprie ou un entretien inadquat ou incorrect. Blackmagic Design
na en aucun cas lobligation de fournir un service en vertu de la prsente garantie : a) pour rparer
les dommages rsultant de tentatives de rparations, dinstallations ou tous services effectus par
du personnel non qualifi par Blackmagic Design, b) pour rparer tout dommage rsultant d'une
utilisation inadquate ou d'une connexion du matriel incompatible, c) pour rparer tout dommage
ou dysfonctionnement causs par lutilisation de pices ou de fournitures nappartenant pas la
marque de Blackmagic Design, d) pour examiner un produit qui a t modifi ou intgr dautres
produits quand limpact dune telle modification ou intgration augmente les dlais ou la difficult
dexaminer ce produit. CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTE GARANTIE EXPLICITE OU TACITE.
BLACKMAGIC DESIGN ET SES REVENDEURS DCLINENT EXPRESSMENT TOUTE GARANTIE
TACITE DE COMMERCIALISATION OU D'ADQUATION UNE FIN PARTICULIRE. LA
RESPONSABILIT DE BLACKMAGIC DESIGN POUR RPARER OU REMPLACER UN PRODUIT
S'AVRANT DFECTUEUX CONSTITUE LA TOTALIT ET LE SEUL RECOURS EXCLUSIF PRVU ET
FOURNI AU CONSOMMATEUR POUR TOUT DOMMAGE INDIRECT, SPCIFIQUE, ACCIDENTEL OU
CONSCUTIF, PEU IMPORTE QUE BLACKMAGIC DESIGN OU SES REVENDEURS AIENT T
INFORMS OU SE SOIENT RENDU COMPTE AU PRALABLE DE L'VENTUALIT DE CES
DOMMAGES. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN NE PEUT TRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DE TOUTE
UTILISATION ILLICITE DU MATRIEL PAR LE CONSOMMATEUR. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN N'EST PAS
RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES RSULTANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE PRODUIT. LE
CONSOMMATEUR UTILISE CE PRODUIT SES SEULS RISQUES.
Copyright 2017 Blackmagic Design. Tous droits rservs. 'Blackmagic Design, DeckLink, HDLink, Workgroup Videohub,
Multibridge Pro, Multibridge Extreme, Intensity et Leading the creative video revolution sont des marques dposes aux
tats-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Tous les autres noms de socit et de produits peuvent tre des marques dposes des socits
respectives auxquelles ils sont associs.
Garantie 148
Installations- und Bedienungsanleitung
Blackmagic
Studio Cameras
Juni 2017
Deutsch
Willkommen!
Vielen Dank, dass Sie sich zum Kauf einer Blackmagic Studio Camera entschieden haben!
Auch wir sind restlos vom Design der Blackmagic Studio Camera und Micro Studio
Camera 4K begeistert. Schon als Teenager war ich Feuer und Flamme fr die
Liveproduktion, weil sie so spannend ist!
Klassische Kameras mit Talkback und Tally waren frher extrem teuer und derart sperrig,
dass sie schwer zu handhaben waren. Dieses Problem wollten wir mit einer kompakteren
Kamera mit all den Talkback-, Tally- und Kamerabedienfunktionen von physisch erheblich
greren Kameras ausrumen.
Deshalb wurde die Blackmagic Studio Camera entwickelt. Unser Ziel war es, eine viel
kleinere Kamera zu bauen, die sich besser tragen lsst. Aber normalerweise haben
kleine Kameras auch kleine Bildschirme. Und das war nicht Sinn der Sache. Was wir
wirklich wollten, war ein viel grerer Sucher! Das Resultat ist die Blackmagic Studio
Camera, die kleinste unter den Broadcast-Kameras, aber mit einem ubergroen
Sucher ausgerustet. Damit arbeitet es sich wunderbar. Die przise Fokussierung und
Bildausschnittswahl werden mit einem derart groen Sucher zum Kinderspiel.
Selbstverstndlich sind auch Tally-Indikatoren und Talkback mit dabei. Und natrlich
bekommen Sie eine Kamera von ausgezeichneter Qualitt mit flexiblem MFT-
Objektivanschluss. Alles was Sie brauchen in einem kompletten Paket! Sie knnen
grere Mikrofone mit Windschutz und sogar Phantomspeisung anschlieen. berdies
kann der Benutzer ein optionales SFP-Glasfasermodul installieren. Ideal fr den Betrieb
der Kamera aus kilometerweiter Entfernung von Ihrem Mischer. Bei Bedarf knnen Sie
sogar zustzlich einen HyperDeck Shuttle Rekorder anschlieen und die Kamera fr
generelle Produktionszwecke benutzen.
Die Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K geht in puncto kleines Bauma bei groer
Leistung sogar noch einen Schritt weiter als die Blackmagic Studio Camera! Dieser
Kamerawinzling packt einen groartigen Ultra-HD-Sensor in ein verblffend kleines
Gehuse und bietet diverse Mglichkeiten fr die Fernbedienung. Jetzt knnen
Sie an Locations, die frher unmglich gewesen wren, broadcasttaugliches
Produktionsmaterial einfangen, weil die Kamera komplett ber einen ATEM Mischer oder
ber eine anwenderspezifische Fernbedienung steuerbar ist.
Wir wnschen Ihnen frohes Schaffen mit Ihrer neuen Kamera und sind sehr gespannt auf
Ihre kreativen Ergebnisse!
Grant Petty
CEO Blackmagic Design
Inhalt
Blackmagic Studio Cameras
Studio-Einstellungen168 Garantie
196
Inhalt
Erste Schritte
Anbringen eines Objektivs
Um die Arbeit mit Ihrer Blackmagic Studio Camera oder Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
aufzunehmen, brauchen Sie nichts weiter tun, als ein Objektiv anzubringen und die Kamera
einzuschalten. Halten Sie zum Entfernen der Staubschutzkappe vom Objektivanschluss die
Verriegelungstaste gedrckt und drehen Sie dann die Kappe gegen den Uhrzeigersinn, bis sie sich lst.
Wir empfehlen, Ihre Kamera immer auszuschalten, ehe Sie ein Objektiv anbringen oder abnehmen.
So bringen Sie ein Objektiv an:
1 Richten Sie den Punkt an Ihrem Objektiv auf den Punkt am Objektivanschluss der Kamera
aus. Bei vielen Objektiven ist dieser Punkt blau, rot oder wei und manche Objektive sind
auf andere Weise markiert.
2 Drehen Sie das Objektiv im Uhrzeigersinn, bis es einrastet.
3 Halten Sie zum Abnehmen des Objektivs die Verriegelungstaste gedrckt, drehen Sie das
Objektiv gegen den Uhrzeigersinn, bis der Punkt bzw. die Ansetzmarkierung die 12-Uhr-
Position erreicht hat und nehmen Sie das Objektiv vorsichtig ab.
Wenn kein Objektiv an der Kamera angebracht ist, liegt der Objektivanschluss frei und kann leicht
durch Staub oder andere Ablagerungen verschmutzt werden. Deswegen empfiehlt es sich, die
Staubschutzkappe mglichst stndig an der Kamera zu belassen.
1 1
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
2 2
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
So wird ein Objektiv an die Micro Studio Camera 4K angebracht bzw. entfernt
Die Micro Studio Camera 4K funktioniert mit LP-E6- und LP-E6N-Akkus, die sich ber ein externes
Akkuladegert oder per Erhaltungsladung ber die Kamera aufladen lassen. Die Kamera kann auch
ber eine externe Quelle mit Strom versorgt und bedient werden. Bei Unterbrechung der externen
Stromversorgung schaltet sie automatisch auf die andere Quelle um. Externer Strom wird der
MicroStudio Camera 4K ber ihren Expansionsport zugefhrt.
1 Drcken Sie die Ein-/Austaste an der rechten Seite der Kamera. Das nun aufleuchtende
Tally-Licht zeigt den eingeschalteten Zustand der Kamera an.
2 Halten Sie die Ein-/Austaste gedrckt, um die Kamera auszuschalten.
Das war fr den Einstieg schon alles. Jetzt knnen Sie Ihre Kamera an einen Mischer oder einen
ATEM Converter anschlieen und mit der Erstellung Ihrer Live-Produktion loslegen!
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
SDI IN
REF
REF
12V
12V
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1 IN 3 1 1 3 1 REMOTE REMOTE
1 3 5 1 7 3 9 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH
STEREO IN
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
Schlieen Sie Ihre Kamera an einen ATEM Mischer an, indem Sie den SDI-Ausgang der Kamera mit
dem SDI-Eingang des Mischers verbinden. Stellen Sie fr die Kamerasteuerung eine Verbindung
zwischen einem beliebigen nicht downkonvertierten Ausgang des ATEM Mischers und dem SDI-
Programmeingang Ihrer Kamera her. Am schnellsten und einfachsten koppeln Sie Ihren Mischer ber
einen seiner Programmausgnge an die Kamera.
2
3
4
1
PUSH
5 2
PUSH
Linke Kameraseite
2 LANC-Fernbedienung
Die 2,5mm-Klinkenbuchse fr die LANC-Fernbedienung untersttzt Blenden-, Zoom- und
Fokussiersteuerung.
3 Luftfahrt-Headsets
0,25-Zoll-TRS-Klinkenbuchse fr Luftfahrt-Headsets, um das Audio vom Programm (PGM)
und aus dem Regieraum mitzuhren.
4 Mikrofon-Kopfhrer-Eingang
0,206-Zoll-TRS-Klinkenbuchse fr Luftfahrt-Headsets, um mit dem Regieraum zu
kommunizieren.
5 Audioeingnge
2 x 1/4 Zoll symmetrische XLR-Buchsen fr die Audioeingabe.
Nheres siehe Abschnitt Blackmagic Studio Camera linke Kameraseite
in diesem Handbuch.
12
11
6 OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
7 SDI OUT
8 SDI IN
9 REF
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 18 20 21 22 10 12V
Kamerarckseite
11 10-Zoll-LCD
Fr das Monitoring der Live-Kamera- oder Programmausgabe oder zur Menansicht.
Nheres finden Sie im Abschnitt Einstellungen fr das Monitoring in diesem Handbuch.
12 Rckwrtiges Tally-Licht
Im erleuchteten Zustand zeigt es dem Kamerabediener an, dass seine Kamera gegenwrtig
auf Sendung ist.
13 FOCUS-Taste
Einmaliges Drcken der FOCUS-Taste zur automatischen Scharfstellung (Autofokus)
oderzweimaliges Drcken zur Anzeige von Focus Peaking auf dem LCD.
14 IRIS-Taste
Einmaliges Drcken fr Belichtungsautomatik (Auto Exposure).
15 PTT-Taste
Push-to-Talk-Taste zum Sprechen gedrckt halten. Zweimaliges Drcken der PPT-Taste
in schneller Folge ermglicht die handfreie Kommunikation. Erneutes Drcken bringt das
standardmige Verhalten zurck.
16 PGM-Taste
Das Drcken der Programmtaste bewirkt den Wechsel zwischen der Live-Kameraausgabe
und der Programmausgabe vom Mischer-Regieraum.
17 LUT-Taste
Die Look-Up-Table-Taste ist gegenwrtig nicht ausgefhrt.
Funktionsmerkmale der Kamera 154
12V
SDI IN
19 SET-Taste
Besttigen Sie mit der SET-Taste Ihre im Men getroffene Auswahl.
SDI OUT
20 DISP-Taste
OPTICAL IN
OPTICAL OUT
Das Drcken der Displaytaste schaltet eingeblendete Overlays ein oder aus.
21 MENU-Taste
Die Mentaste erlaubt den Zugriff auf das Men auf dem LCD.
22 Ein-/Austaste
Die Blackmagic Studio Camera wird per Druck auf die Ein-/Austaste eingeschaltet.
HaltenSie diese Taste zum Ausschalten der Kamera gedrckt.
Nheres erfahren Sie im Abschnitt Funktionen der Bedientasten in diesem Handbuch.
Kameraunterseite
23 USB-BUCHSE
USB-Mini-B-Port zur Aktualisierung der Kamera-Firmware. Siehe Abschnitt Blackmagic
Camera Setup in diesem Handbuch.
23
1 2 4
5
6
PUSH
2
7
3
8
PUSH
Rechte Kameraseite
9 Analogaudio-Eingang
3,5mm-Stereoklinkenbuchse, im Men zwischen Mikrofon- und Referenzpegel-Eingang
umschaltbar.
10 SDI OUT
SDI-Ausgang zum Anschluss an einen Mischer, externen Rekorder oder andere Gerte.
11 SDI IN
Der SDI-Eingang gestattet die Steuerung der Kamera ber ATEM Mischer oder das
Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shield.
12 Kopfhrer-/Talkback-Anschluss
3,5mm-Buchse fr Talkback mit Headsets von iPhone, Android usw. Durch doppeltes
Drcken der Wiedergabe-/Pausentaste an Ihrem Headset schalten Sie Talkback
ein, durch eimaliges Drcken schalten Sie es wieder aus.
10
13
11
12
Kameraoberseite
14 Akku-Entriegelung
Schieben Sie den Mechanismus nach vorne, um den Akku zu entriegeln.
Kameraunterseite
15 USB-Buchse
USB-Port zur Aktualisierung der Kamera-Firmware. Siehe Abschnitt Blackmagic Camera
Setup in diesem Handbuch.
14
15
Kamera-Anschlsse
Blackmagic Studio Camera linke Seite
LANC-Fernbedienung
ber den Remote-Port Ihrer Kamera lassen sich bei Einsatz eines kompatiblen Objektivs die
Fokussierung, Blenden- und Zoomeinstellungen des Objektivs fernsteuern. Der Port in Form einer
2,5mm-Stereoklinkenbuchse verwendet das LANC-Standardprotokoll.
Aktive MFT-Objektive gestatten Ihnen, den Zoomservo per LANC-Fernbedienung zu steuern.
Folgende Objektive werden zurzeit untersttzt:
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 1442 mm f/3,55,6 Objektiv mit Power O.I.S
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 45175 mm f/4,0-5,6 Zoomobjektiv mit O.I.S.
Olympus M.Zuiko ED 1250mm f/3,56,3 EZ Micro 4/3 Digitalobjektiv
Olympus M.Zuiko Digital ED 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 EZ Micro 4/3 Lens
Kopfhrerausgang
Ausgang fr Luftfahrt-Headsets mit Fixed Wing-Steckern, um das Audio aus dem Programm und
aus der Tonregie anzuhren. Das Angebot von Luftfahrt-Headsets reicht von Ohrhrermodellen fr
Studioumgebungen bis zu kompletten, lrmreduzierenden Modellen fr Konzerte und
Sportveranstaltungen mit hohen Lautstrkepegeln. Ton wird den Kanlen 15 und 16 des
eingehenden SDI-Signals entnommen. Da die Kanle 15 und 16 nur in den seltensten Fllen whrend
der Produktion eingesetzt werden, bieten sie sich zum Einsatz fr Audio-Talkback an.
Kamera-Anschlsse 157
Mikrofon-Kopfhrer-Eingang
Dieser Eingang ermglicht die Kommunikation mit der Steuerzentrale ber Luftfahrt-Headsets.
Tonwird in Kanal 15 und 16 der SDI-Signalausgabe eingebettet.
Audioeingnge
Zwei Kanle professionelles symmetrisches Analogaudio werden via XLR-Buchsen untersttzt.
Stellen Sie die Eingabepegel fr die beiden Kanle ber das Audiomen ein. Die Eingnge
untersttzen ebenso Mikrofonpegel- wie auch Referenzpegel-Eingaben. Die Eingabeart wird
ebenfalls im Audiomen ausgewhlt. Audio wird in Kanal 1 und 2 des SDI-Datenflusses eingebettet.
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
SDI OUT
Verwenden Sie den SDI-Ausgang, um 10-Bit-Videodaten in 4:2:2 an professionelles SDI-Equipment
wie Kreuzschienen, Monitore, SDI-Erfassungsgerte und Broadcast-Mischer auszugeben. Die
Blackmagic Studio Camera HD untersttzt 3G-SDI, und die Studio Camera 4K untersttzt 12G-SDI.
SDI IN
ber den SDI-Eingang kann der Kamerabediener das ausgegebene Programm (PGM) betrachten.
Drcken Sie einfach die PGM-Taste, um zwischen der Live-Kameraausgabe und der
Programmausgabe aus der Mischregie umzuschalten.
Wenn sowohl an den Glasfaser- als auch an den SDI-Eingang Gerte angeschlossen sind, wird die
Ausgabe des zuerst angeschlossenen Gerts verwendet. Wird mit der Studio Camera auf ein
anderes Gert aufgezeichnet, beispielsweise einen Blackmagic Hyperdeck Shuttle, lsst sich der
Ausgang des Hyperdecks an den SDI-Eingang der Kamera anschlieen. Dies erlaubt die
Wiedergabe des soeben aufgezeichneten Filmmaterials.
Kamera-Anschlsse 158
Referenzeingang
Erlaubt die Synchronisierung mehrerer Kameras mit Genlock ber ein Blackburst- oder Tri-Level-
Referenzsignal. Die Genlock-Synchronisierung von Kameras mit einem externen Referenzsignal
verhindert Zeitversatzfehler, die beim Umschalten zwischen verschiedenen Kameras zu strenden
Bildbewegungen fhren knnen.
Stromversorgung
Verwenden Sie die 1224V-Strombuchse, um Ihr Netzteil anzuschlieen und den Akku der
Blackmagic Studio Camera HD und der Blackmagic Studio Camera 4K aufzuladen. Ein voll
aufgeladener Akku gibt der Studio Camera HD eine Betriebsdauer von rund vier Stunden und der
Studio Camera 4K bis zu drei Stunden.
Die Blackmagic Studio Camera 2 sowie die Studio Camera 4K 2 haben keine integrierten Akkus.
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
REF
12V
MENU
EXPANSION
SET
Kamera-Anschlsse 159
Expansionsport
Das kleine Bauma der Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K macht es einfach, einzigartige Shots
aus unmittelbarer Nhe der Action oder aus schwer zugnglichen Pltzen einzufangen. Man kann
zwar die Micro Studio Camera 4K leicht verbergen, allerdings ist das fr ihren Bediener nicht
unbedingt der Fall. Deshalb ist die Fernbedienung der Kamera ein wichtiger Aspekt, um die Vorteile
ihres winzigen Formfaktors voll auszuschpfen.
ber den SDI-Eingang der Micro Studio Camera 4K knnen Sie einen Teil der Kameraeinstellungen mit
einem ATEM Mischer anpassen. Nheres finden Sie im Abschnitt Die Mischerfunktion Kamerasteuerung
in diesem Handbuch. Die meisten Steueroptionen werden jedoch ber den Expansionsport ermglicht.
Der DB-HD15-Verbinder der Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K bietet mehrere Anschlsse, u.a. fr
Strom, LANC-Fernsteuerung, Schwenk-, Neige-, und Zoom-Funktionen sowie Genlock, deren Benutzung
ber das mitgelieferte Expansionskabel erfolgt. Fr den Zugriff auf spezielle Funktionen empfehlen wir Ihnen
den Gebrauch von berall erhltlichen, gngigen Kabeln. berdies besteht die Alternative, Verbindungen
nach eigenem Bedarf zu lten, um die Micro Studio Camera 4K Ihren Anforderungen anzupassen. Nheres
erfahren Sie im Abschnitt Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K Expansionskabel in diesem Handbuch.
SDI OUT
Verwenden Sie den SDI-Ausgang, um 10-Bit-Videodaten in 4:2:2 an professionelles SDI-Equipment
wie Kreuzschienen, Monitore, SDI-Erfassungsgerte und Broadcast-Mischer auszugeben.
DieBlackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K untersttzt 6G-SDI. Um die Gerte ber SDI-Anschlsse in
Originalgre anschlieen zu knnen, bentigen Sie ein DIN-1.0/2.3-zu-SDI-Adapterkabel.
SDI IN
Benutzen Sie den SDI-Anschluss, um Ihre Micro Studio Camera 4K ber den ATEM Mischer zu
steuern. Im Abschnitt Die Mischerfunktion Kamerasteuerung finden Sie Informationen zu den
vorhandenen Steuerungsmglichkeiten.
TIPP Sie knnen Ihre Micro Studio Camera auch ber ein Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino
Shield steuern. Das Shield bettet dieselben Blackmagic Control Datenpakete in das
SDI-Signal ein wie ATEM Mischer. Indem Sie also den Programm-Return-Feed von einem
beliebigen SDI-Mischer durch das Shield und an den SDI-Eingang Ihrer Kamera leiten,
haben Sie Zugriff auf alle Blackmagic Kamerasteuerungsmglichkeiten, die Sie ber einen
ATEM Mischer haben.
Kamera-Anschlsse 160
Kopfhrer-/Talkback-Audio
ber den 3,5mm-Kopfhrer- bzw. Talkback-Anschluss knnen Sie mit gngigen Kopfhrern, wie die
Ihrer iPhone- oder Android-Gerte, mit dem Regieraum kommunizieren. Drcken Sie die
Wiedergabe-/Pausentaste zweimal, um die Talkback-Funktion zu aktivieren. Durch einmaliges
Drcken wird sie deaktiviert. Ton wird in Kanal 15 und 16 der SDI-Signalausgabe eingebettet.
Individualisierung
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K Expansionskabel
Es gibt zwei Mglichkeiten, auf die Funktionen des Expansionsports zuzugreifen. Sie knnen dazu
entweder das Expansionskabel benutzen, das im Lieferumfang Ihrer Micro Studio Camera 4K
enthalten ist, oder Ihre eigenen individualisierten Anschlsse lten.
Das Expansionskabel verfgt ber Anschlsse fr die folgenden Steuermglichkeiten.
4 Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable
1 Stromeingang
Der 12V-Stromanschluss lsst sich ber einen Gleichstromstecker verbinden und speist
die Micro Studio Camera 4K mit Strom. Zudem werden angeschlossene Akkus geladen.
Wenndie Kamera mit Netzstrom versorgt wird, schaltet sie sich automatisch an.
2 Referenzeingang
Erlaubt die Synchronisierung mehrerer Kameras mit Genlock ber ein Blackburst- oder
Tri-Level-Referenzsignal. Die Genlock-Synchronisierung von Kameras mit einem externen
Referenzsignal verhindert Zeitversatzfehler, die beim Umschalten zwischen verschiedenen
Kameras zu strenden Bildbewegungen fhren knnen.
3 LANC
Schlieen Sie drahtgebundene LANC-Fernbedienungen an die 2,5mm-Buchse an,
um unter Einsatz von kompatiblen Objektiven Funktionen wie Zoom-, Blenden- und
Fokuseinstellungen von einem Stativarm aus zu bedienen.
4 Schwenk-, Neige- und Zoom-Funktion
Der RS-422-Anschluss bermittelt vom SDI-Eingang der Micro Studio Camera 4K
eingehende Schwenk-, Neige- und Zoom-Befehle an einen motorbetriebenen Kopf.
Individualisierung 161
5 B4-Kommunikation
Broadcastobjektive, die ber einen MFT-zu-B4-Adapter an die Micro Studio Camera 4K
angeschlossen wurden, knnen ber den DB-9-Anschluss mit Strom versorgt und bedient
werden. Verbinden Sie zur Steuerung eines kompatiblen B4-Objektivs lediglich das
optionale Digital B4 Control Adapterkabel mit dem Kabel des Objektivs und das andere
Ende mit dem seriellen DB-9-Verbinder an Ihrem Expansionskabel.
Nehmen Sie Einstellungen fr Blende, Fokus und Zoom auf dieselbe Weise vor, wie Sie es
bei einem aktiven MFT-Objektiv tun wrden entweder ber das Men Kamerasteuerung
eines ATEM Mischers oder ber die anderen Fernbedienungsinterfaces, auf die Sie ber
das Expansionskabel der Micro Studio Camera 4K zugreifen knnen. Eine Liste untersttzter
digitaler B4-Objektive finden Sie im Blackmagic Design Support Center unter
www.blackmagicdesign.com/de/support/faq/59011.
6 S.Bus Digitalservo
Wenn Sie mithilfe des Futaba-J-Kabels einen kompatiblen S.Bus-Empfnger anschlieen,
stehen Ihnen 18 S.Bus-Kanle zur Verfgung, die mit Funktionen der Kamera belegt und
daraufhin fernbedient werden knnen. Zu diesen Features zhlen Fokus, Servo-Zoom,
Blendeneinstellungen und weitere Funktionen. Weitere Informationen zu Mapping-
Funktionen finden Sie unter Fernbedienungseinstellungen in diesem Handbuch.
P1 PIN ASSIGNMENT
2 S. Bus 1
2 P2
GROUND 3
GROUND 1
12 PTZ RS422 Rx- 2
8 PTZ RS422 Tx+ 3 5
9
GROUND 4 4
GROUND
5
6
3
2
8
7 P3
6
13 PTZ RS422 Rx+ 7 1
5 15
GROUND 1
10 14 B4 Lens Control Transmit 2 5
9
4 14 4
15 B4 Lens Control Receive 3
P4
9 8
3 13 3
8 GROUND 4 2
7
2
7
12 6 Power +12V in* 5 1
6
1 11 OTHER
6
* Power input to the camera is also used to power the lens. Beware of applying excessive voltages if youre using
your own power supply to avoid damage to the lens.
Individualisierung 162
Einstellungen
Fr ein bestmgliches Bild knnen Sie die Einstellungen auf Ihrer Blackmagic Kamera anpassen.
Dazu zhlen Videoformat, Verschlusszeit und Weiabgleich. Auerdem knnen Sie Tonpegel,
Monitoring-Einstellungen, Studio-Tally- und Talkback-Einstellungen fr die Kommunikation mit dem
Regieraum festlegen.
Dieser Handbuchabschnitt enthlt detaillierte Informationen zu jeder Kameraeinstellung, wie:
Kamera-Einstellungen
Um die Einstellungen auf der Blackmagic Studio Camera oder der Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera
4K zu konfigurieren, drcken Sie die MENU-Taste. Benutzen Sie die Pfeiltasten, um Optionen
auszuwhlen, und besttigen Sie Ihre Auswahl per Druck auf die SET-Taste.
Wenn Sie mit der Micro Studio Camera 4K arbeiten, mssen Sie einen externen Monitor an den
HDMI-Kameraport anschlieen, um Meneinstellungen zu sehen.
Video Format
Whlen Sie Ihr gewnschtes Videoformat mithilfe der Pfeiltasten aus. Um bspw. zwischen
den Formaten
1080p und 1080i zu whlen, durchlaufen Sie mit der Rechts- bzw. Linkspfeiltaste die Formatoptionen.
Drcken Sie zur Besttigung des gewnschten Formats die SET-Taste.
Bitte entnehmen Sie die untersttzten Formate der Tabelle auf der nchsten Seite.
Gain
Gain-Einstellungen sind beim Filmen in Verhltnissen mit geringem Licht hilfreich. Der voreingestellte
Wert betrgt 0dB. Der Gain-Wert lsst sich in Schritten von jeweils 6dB bis zu +18dB steigern.
Detail
Diese Einstellung dient zur Schrfung Ihres Bildes live unmittelbar von Ihrer Studio Camera.
Verringern oder steigern Sie das Schrfungsniveau, indem Sie Off (Aus) oder Default (Standard)
fr geringfgige Schrfung bzw. Medium (Mittel) oder High (Hoch) fr strkere Schrfung whlen.
Auto Exposure
Die Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K verfgt ber mehrere Optionen der Belichtungsautomatik.
Iris
Hlt die Verschlusszeit bei wechselnder Blendenffnung konstant und liefert so eine konstante
Belichtung.
Shutter
Hlt die Blendenffnung bei wechselnder Verschlusszeit konstant und liefert so eine konstante Belichtung.
Shutter + Iris
Behlt die korrekte Belichtungsstrke durch Anpassung der Verschlusszeit bei. Wenn die Belichtung
bei maximal oder minimal verfgbarer Verschlusszeit nicht beibehalten werden kann, beginnt die
Micro Studio Camera 4K mit der Anpassung der Verschlusszeit, um die Blendenffnung konstant
zu halten.
Manual Trigger
Blendenffnung und Verschlusszeit werden manuell vorgegeben und die Belichtung verndert sich
bei variierenden Lichtverhltnissen.
Weiabgleich
Es stehen 18 Weiabgleich-Voreinstellungen fr verschiedene Farbtemperaturverhltnisse zur
Verfgung.
2500K, 2800K, 3000K, 3200K, 3400K, 3600K, 4000K, 4500K und 4800K
fr verschiedene Bedingungen bei Kunstlicht, Glhbirnen- oder Neonlicht oder bei
gedmpftem natrlichen Licht wie Kerzenlicht, Sonnenauf- oder -untergang, Morgen- und
Nachmittagslicht.
5000K, 5200K, 5400K und 5600K fr Auenaufnahmen an klaren, sonnigen Tagen.
6000K, 6500K, 7000 K, 7500K und 8000K fr verschiedenartige Tageslichtverhltnisse.
Shutter Speed
Die Verschlusszeit gibt zusammen mit der Gain-Einstellung die Lichtmenge vor, die auf den Sensor
gelassen wird. Es sind 15 verschiedene Verschlusszeiten von 1/50 sec bis 1/2000 sec verfgbar.
Einstellungen 164
Blackmagic Studio Blackmagic Studio Blackmagic Micro Studio
Camera Camera 4K Camera 4K
2160p/23,98 2160p/29,97
2160p/24 2160p/30
2160p/25
2160p/29,97
2160p/30
2160p/50
2160p/59,94
2160p/60
Audio-Einstellungen
Drcken Sie zur Vorgabe der Einstellungen fr die Eingabe- und Audiokontrolle Ihrer Blackmagic
Studio Camera die MENU-Taste und whlen Sie das links im Display angezeigte Mikrofonsymbol aus.
Navigieren Sie mithilfe der Pfeiltasten durch die Menoptionen und drcken Sie die SET-Taste, um
Ihre Auswahl zu besttigen.
Einstellungen 165
Automatic Gain Control
Die Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K verfgt ber Einstellungen fr die automatische
Lautstrkesteuerung, ber die die Kamera die Aufnahmepegel fr Audioinhalte anpasst. Die Kamera
senkt die Audioverstrkung automatisch, wenn die Eingabepegel zu hoch sind bzw. erhht sie
etwas, wenn die Eingabepegel zu niedrig sind.
Audio Input
Schaltet fr die Audioeingabe zwischen der kamerainternen Mikrofonbuchse und den XLR-
Audiobuchsen der Kamera um.
Microphone Level
ber Microphone input (Mikrofoneingang) knnen die Aufnahmepegel des eingebauten Mikrofons
angepasst werden. Schieben Sie zum Erhhen oder Verringern der Pegel den Audio-Schieberegler nach
links oder rechts. Die Studio Camera weist ein eingebautes Stereomikrofon auf. Wenn keine externe
Audioquelle angeschlossen ist, zeichnet das eingebaute Mikrofon auf die Audiokanle 1 und 2 auf.
Input Level
Anschlsse fr externes Audio untersttzen hochpegelige und niederpegelige Tonsignale. Whlen
Sie Line, um externe Audiogerte wie beispielsweise einen Tonmixer oder Verstrker
anzuschlieen. Geben Sie je nach der Signalstrke Ihres Mikrofons die Einstellung Mic Low
(Niedrig) oder Mic High (Hoch) vor. Es ist wichtig, den passenden Pegel auszuwhlen, damit
vermieden wird, dass Ihr Audio kaum hrbar oder zu laut und verzerrt klingt. Stellen Sie die externen
Audioeingangspegel mithilfe der Links- und Rechtspfeiltasten ein.
Ch 1 Input
Schieben Sie zum Erhhen oder Verringern der Pegel fr Kanal 1 den Audio-Schieberegler nach
links oder rechts. Externe Audioeingaben haben Vorrang vor dem eingebauten Mikrofon und
werden auf Audiokanal 1 ausgegeben.
Ch 2 Uses Ch 1 Input
Aktivieren Sie diese Option, um externes Audio von Channel 1 in die Kanle 1 und 2, die ber den SDI-
Ausgang oder den optionalen Glasfaserausgang bermittelt werden, einzubetten. Dies bewirkt dasselbe
wie wenn Sie Input 1 an beide Audiokanle der Kamera anschlieen. Ntzlich bei Einsatz von Mikrofonen
mit einem einzelnen Mini-Audioausgang, wenn beide Stereoaudiokanle angeschlossen werden sollen.
Die Auswahl von Off bewirkt, dass Kanal-1-Audio nur auf dem einen Kanal bleibt, und Kanal 2 den Ton von
der Kanal-2-Audioeingabe bernimmt. Bei Verwendung von Stereoaudioquellen wird dies bevorzugt.
Ch 2 Input
Schieben Sie zum Erhhen oder Verringern der Pegel fr Kanal 2 den Audio-Schieberegler nach
links oder rechts. Externe Audioeingaben haben Vorrang vor dem eingebauten Mikrofon und
werden auf Audiokanal 2 ausgegeben.
Phantom Power
Phantomspeisung liefert Strom ber Mikrofonkabel und ist praktisch als Stromquelle fr
Kondensatormikrofone. Aktivieren bzw. deaktivieren Sie Phantom Power" fr Studiokameras mit
XLR-Anschlssen, indem Sie zum Audio-Men navigieren und dort mithilfe der Pfeiltasten On (Ein)
bzw. Off (Aus) auswhlen. Phantomspeisung wird automatisch deaktiviert, wenn die Einstellung fr
Line Input Level ausgewhlt ist. Warten Sie mindestens 10 Sekunden, damit sich die Phantomspeisung
entladen kann, ehe sie ein Mikrofon mit eigener Stromversorgung anschlieen. / ein eigenversorgtes
Mikrofon anschlieen. ltere Bndchenmikrofone sind nicht fr die Phantomspeisung geeignet.
Einstellungen 166
Einstellungen fr das Monitoring Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
HDMI Meters
Die Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K gibt Ihnen die Mglichkeit, bevorzugte Pegelmesser mit der
HDMI-Ausgabe anzuzeigen.
Histogramm
Das Histogramm stellt die Kontraste zwischen weien und schwarzen Tonwerten anhand einer
horizontalen Skala dar. Am linken Rand des Histogramms werden die Schatten bzw. Schwarzwerte
und ganz rechts die Lichter bzw. Weiwerte angezeigt. Wenn Sie die Blende schlieen oder ffnen,
wird Ihnen auffallen, dass sich die Helligkeitsinformationen im Histogramm entsprechend nach links
oder rechts verschieben.
ber diese Einstellungen wird das Histogramm ein- und ausgeschaltet. Ist das Histogramm
zusammen mit HDMI Overlays aktiviert, erscheint es in der rechten unteren Ecke eines
angeschlossenen Monitors.
Audio
Der Audiopegelmesser stellt die aktuelle Lautstrke der linken und rechten Audiokanle anhand von
zwei horizontalen Balken dar. Der linke Kanal befindet sich oben, der rechte unten. Klettern Ihre
Audiopegel zu hoch, besteht das Risiko einer bersteuerung Ihrer Gipfelwerte mit resultierender
Soundverzerrung. Um dies zu vermeiden, passen Sie die Audioverstrkung auf Ihrer Kamera
solange an, bis Ihre Audiopegel innerhalb des sicheren Bereichs bleiben.
ber diese Einstellungen wird der Audiopegelmesser ein- und ausgeschaltet. Bei Aktivierung
erscheint er unten links auf einem angeschlossenem Monitor, wenn die Option
HDMI Overlays ebenfalls eingeschaltet ist.
HDMI Overlays
Diese Einstellung ist ausschlielich bei der Micro Studio Camera 4K verfgbar. Ist diese Option mit
On aktiviert, enthlt die HDMI-Videoausgabe
Bildrandmarkierungen und Informationen zu den Kamera-Einstellungen und -Identitten sowie
jegliche Pegelmesser, die in der Einstellung HDMI Meters eingeschaltet wurden.
Brightness
Bewegen Sie den Schieberegler nach links oder rechts, um die Helligkeitseinstellungen des LCDs
anzupassen. Die Standardeinstellung betrgt 60%.
Zebra
Blackmagic Cameras sind mit einer Zebra-Funktion ausgestattet, die Aufschluss ber die
Belichtungsstrken gibt. Ein diagonales Linienmuster erscheint ber jedem Videobereich, der die
Zebra-Belichtungsstrke berschreitet.
Schalten Sie Zebra ein und whlen Sie mithilfe der Links- und Rechtspfeiltasten den gewnschten
Zebra-Warnpegel aus. Es ist ein Mittelwert voreingestellt.
Einstellungen 167
Focus Peaking
Erlaubt die Einstellung des Pegels fr Focus Peaking. Verfgbare Einstellungen sind: Off (Aus),
Low (Niedrig), Medium (Mittel) und High (Hoch). Passen Sie diese Einstellung an, wenn Sie ein
extrem scharfes Objektiv benutzen und die Peaking-Markierungen das ganze Bild bedecken. Es ist
ein Mittelwert voreingestellt.
Studio-Einstellungen
Drcken Sie die MENU-Taste und whlen Sie das Kopfhrersymbol aus, um die Display-
Einstellungen des LCD vorzugeben. Wechseln Sie mithilfe der Pfeiltasten durch die Menoptionen
und drcken Sie die SET-Taste, um Ihre Auswahl zu besttigen.
Kameranummer
Wenn Ihre Studio Camera Tally-Signale von einem ATEM Mischer empfangen soll, mssen Sie auf
Ihrer Kamera zunchst eine Kameranummer vorgeben. Dies gewhrleistet, dass der Mischer das
Tally-Signal an die richtige Kamera bermittelt. Die Kameranummer kann auf einen Wert zwischen
199 eingestellt werden. Die Standardeinstellung betrgt 1.
Einstellungen 168
TIPP Sie knnen den Programm-Return-Feed von einem beliebigen SDI-Mischer ber ein
Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shield an Ihre Kamera leiten, sodass Sie auf jeder Kamera
Tally-Signale empfangen knnen. Alle SDI-Mischer mit Open-Collector-Ausgngen fr Tally
sind fr den Empfang von Tally-Signalen ber ein Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shield
konfigurierbar. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im Abschnitt Tally ber das Blackmagic
3G-SDI Arduino Shield verbinden.
Reference Source
Dient zur Auswahl der Genlock-Quelle. Die Studio Camera kann Genlock am Programm-SDI-Eingang
oder von einer externen Genlock-Quelle einsetzen. Bereiten Sie sich bei Verwendung einer
externen Genlock-Quelle darauf vor, dass der Wechsel der Quelle hchstwahrscheinlich zu einer
Strung beim Synchronisieren der Kamera fhren wird.
Reference Timing
Erlaubt Ihnen die manuelle Abstimmung der Referenzzeitvorgabe nach Zeilen oder Pixeln.
Headset Level
Bewegen Sie zum Erhhen oder Verringern der Pegel fr das Audio-Monitoring den Lautstrke-
Schieberegler nach links oder rechts. Die Standardeinstellung betrgt 50%.
Program Mix
ndert das Lautstrkeverhltnis von Kameraton zu Talkback-Ton. Die Kopfhrer geben den jeweils
auf dem LCD angezeigten Ton aus. Beispiel: Wenn Sie sich in der Kameraansicht befinden, ist der
Ton von der Kamera zu hren. Befinden Sie sich jedoch in der Programmansicht, so ist das
Programmaudio zu hren. Die Standardeinstellung betrgt 0%.
Einstellungen 169
Funktionen der Bedientasten
Objektiveinstellungen anpassen
Die Blackmagic Studio Camera untersttzt die elektronische Blendensteuerung. Das erlaubt Ihnen,
Blendeneinstellungen wie die ffnungsweite und automatische Fokussierung anzupassen. Mit der
Focus-Peaking-Funktion werden die schrfsten Bildbereiche grn umrandet, damit Sie sich mhelos
Ihrer Scharfstellung vergewissern knnen. Focus Peaking ist ausschlielich auf dem LCD zu sehen
und wirkt sich nicht auf die SDI-Ausgabe aus.
FOCUS-Taste
Drcken Sie bei Einsatz der Studio Camera mit einem Autofokus-Objektiv die FOCUS-Taste fr
Focus Peaking oder Autofokus. Drcken Sie fr Autofokus einmal auf die FOCUS-Taste. Durch
zweimaliges Drcken der FOCUS-Taste in schneller Folge aktivieren Sie Focus Peaking.
Drcken Sie die FOCUS-Taste bei Einsatz eines manuellen Objektivs einmal.
IRIS-Taste
Bei Verwendung der Dynamikumfang-EinstellungVideo wird durch einmaliges Drcken der IRIS-Taste
eine durchschnittliche Belichtungszeit basierend auf der Helligkeitsverteilung in Ihrer Aufnahme
eingestellt. Bei Verwendung der Dynamikumfang-Einstellung Film wird die Belichtung durch Drcken
der Blendentaste (IRIS) auf die Spitzlichter in Ihrer Aufnahme eingestellt. Um die Belichtungszeit Ihrer
Studio Camera manuell einzustellen, drcken Sie die Auf- und Abwrtstasten zur Mennavigation.
Zustzliche Einstellungen
PTT-Taste
Bei Liveproduktionen muss der Kamerabediener unbedingt mit dem Regisseur und anderen
Mitwirkenden im Regieraum sprechen knnen. Halten Sie einfach die PPT-Taste (Push-to-Talk) gedrckt
und fangen Sie an zu sprechen. Zweimaliges Drcken der PPT-Taste in schneller Folge ermglicht die
handfreie Kommunikation. Erneutes Drcken bringt das standardmige Verhalten zurck.
PGM-Taste
Manchmal ist es wichtig, dass Kamerabediener auch die Programmausgabe und nicht blo die Ansicht
von den eigenen Kameras sehen knnen. Drcken Sie die Programmtaste PGM, um zwischen Live-
Kameraausgabe und der Programmausgabe aus der Mischregie umzuschalten. Ihre externe Videoquelle
lsst sich ber den SDI-Eingang oder ber den benutzeraufrstbaren Glasfasereingang anschlieen.
LUT-Taste
Die Look-Up-Table-Taste ist gegenwrtig nicht ausgefhrt.
SET-Taste
Besttigen Sie mit der SET-Taste Ihre im Men getroffene Auswahl.
DISP-Taste
Per Druck auf die Displaytaste erscheinen auf dem 10-Zoll-Monitor Ihrer Studio Camera ntzliche
Informationen wie:
Bildausschnittmarkierungen, Kamera- und Blendeneinstellungen wie Kameranummer,
Videoformat und Framerate, Verschlusszeit, Weiabgleich, Akkuladestatus, Gain-
Einstellungen und Blendenstufe.
Erneutes Drcken der DISP-Taste schaltet die Overlays aus und es wird nur das Bild angezeigt.
Overlays sind auf dem 10-Zoll-Monitor zu sehen. Die SDI-Ausgabe ist jedoch immer einblendungsfrei.
HINWEIS Die Blackmagic Studio Camera 2 und Studio Camera 4K 2 verfgen nicht
ber interne Akkus, daher zeigen sie auch nicht den verbleibenden Ladezustand an.
Einstellungen 170
MENU-Taste
OPTICAL OUT
Drcken Sie diese Taste, um das Men aufzurufen und navigieren Sie mit den Pfeiltasten.
OPTICAL IN
Ein-/Austaste
SDI OUT
Die Blackmagic Studio Camera wird per Druck auf die Ein-/Austaste eingeschaltet. Halten Sie diese
SDI IN Taste zum Ausschalten der Kamera gedrckt.
REF
12V
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT FOCUS IRIS SET PTT PGM LUT
DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRISSET PTT PGM DISPLAY
LUT MENU SET DISPLAY MENU
SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU
Drcken Sie fr Autofokus Drcken Sie die IRIS-Taste fr Die Studio Camera verfgt
einmal auf die FOCUS-Taste. automatische Belichtung oder ber Einstellungen wie PTT und
Durch zweimaliges Drcken der stellen Sie die Belichtung mit PGM, die fr die Liveproduktion
FOCUS-Taste in schneller Folge den Auf- und Abwrtspfeiltasten unverzichtbar sind
aktivieren Sie Fokus-Peaking manuell ein
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
SDI IN
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
REF
SDI IN
REF
12V
12V
Koppeln Sie Ihre Studio Camera ber SDI oder, sofern ein
optionales SFP-Glasfasermodul installiert wurde, ber Glasfaser
Schlieen Sie den SDI-Ausgang der Kamera an den SDI-Eingang des HyperDecks an, und den
SDI-Ausgang des HyperDecks an den SDI-Eingang der Kamera, um Ihr aufgezeichnetes Material
zu betrachten
Blackmagic Mischer
Kameranummer Eingangsnummer Arduino-Pol
1 1 D2
2 2 D3
3 3 D4
4 4 D5
5 5 D6
6 6 D7
7 7 D8
8 8 D9
Verbinden des Tally anhand eines Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shields 172
In der Beispielskizze unten sehen Sie, nach welchem Schema das Blackmagic Arduino Shield ein
Tally-Signal zu der auf den Programmausgang geschalteten Kamera schickt. Alle SDI-Mischer mit
Open-Collector-Ausgngen sind fr den Empfang von Tally-Signalen ber ein Blackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino Shield konfigurierbar. Laden Sie sich fr weitere Informationen die Blackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino Shield Bedienungsanleitung im Blackmagic Design Support-Center
www.blackmagicdesign.com/de/support herunter.
Die Beispielskizze oben zeigt, nach welchem Schema das Blackmagic Arduino Shield ein Tally-Signal
fr Eingang 1 oder 2 ber den Tally-Ausgang des Mischers erkennt und dieses dann in den SDI-
Ausgang des Shields einbettet. Das Tally-Licht leuchtet daraufhin an der entsprechenden Kamera auf
Verbinden des Tally anhand eines Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shields 173
1
PUSH
2
2
PUSH
Weiteres Zubehr
Fr den Einsatz im Studio mag es wnschenswert sein, die Kamera auf ein Rollstativ zu setzen und
Schienen fr gewichtige Broadcast-Objektive und Teleprompter anzubringen. Der Gebrauch der
Kamera bei Auenbertragungen hingegen erfordert vielleicht den Anschluss von Mikrofonen,
externen Batterien und LANC-Fernbedienungen. Die Kamera ist am Boden mit zwei 3/8-Zoll-
Befestigungspunkten und seitlich und oben mit zehn 1/4-Zoll Befestigungspunkten versehen.
Dasgibt Ihnen die Flexibilitt, Ihr Rig fr Produktionen aller Gren umzubauen.
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1 IN 3 1 1 3 1 REMOTE REMOTE
1 3 5 1 7 3 9 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH
STEREO IN
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
3 1 4 2 OUT
3OUT OUT
4
L R
UT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT IN IN SDI OUT IN
L +12V
R BACKUP L L R R L L R R L R
POWER USB 2.0
OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
ANALOG AUDIO OUTAUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
OUT AUDIO OUT PGM SDI OPTICAL
MICOUT/IN H/PHONE ANALOG AUDIO OUT OP
L R
+12V BACKUP L R L R L R L R
POWER USB 2.0 OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT PGM SDI MIC H/PHONE
Farbrad
Das Farbrad ist eine leistungsstarke Funktion des DaVinci Resolve Farbkorrektors zur Vornahme
farblicher Anpassungen an den Einstellungen fr Lift, Gamma und Gain einzelner YRGB-Kanle.
Die Auswahl der anzupassenden Einstellung erfolgt per Klick auf eine der drei Auswahlschaltflchen
ber dem Farbrad.
Masterrad
Passen Sie mithilfe des nachstehenden Farbrads die Kontraste aller YRGB-Kanle auf einmal an
oder justieren Sie nur jeweils die Leuchtdichte der Einstellungen fr Lift, Gamma und Gain.
Kamera-Einstellungen
ber den Button fr Kamera-Einstellungen unten links neben dem Masterrad knnen Sie die
Farbbalkenfunktion auf Blackmagic Studio Cameras, Micro Studio Cameras und URSA Minis
aktivieren. Zustzlich lassen sich Detaileinstellungen fr das Bildsignal einer jeden Kamera justieren.
Farbbalken anzeigen/verbergen
Blackmagic Studio Cameras verfgen ber eine integrierte Farbbalken-Funktion, die sich per
Aktivierung der entsprechenden Modi zeigen bzw. verbergen lsst. Beim Aufbau fr Ihre
Liveproduktion ist das eine sehr praktische Feature zur visuellen Identifizierung einzelner Kameras.
Mit den Farbbalken wird auch Testton ausgegeben. So knnen Sie die Audiopegel der einzelnen
Kameras bequem prfen.
Detail
Diese Einstellung dient zur Scharfzeichnung Ihres Live-Kamerabilds. Senken bzw. erhhen Sie das
Schrfungsniveau, indem Sie eine dieser Optionen vorgeben: Schrfe aus, Standardschrfe fr
geringfgige Scharfzeichnung, Mittlere Schrfe oder Hohe Schrfe.
Reset-Symbole
Anhand des Reset-Symbols, das sich rechts unten in allen Kamerabedienfeldern befindet, knnen
Sie bequem auswhlen, welche Farbkorrektureinstellungen zurckgesetzt, kopiert oder eingefgt
werden sollen. Jedes Farbrad verfgt ber ein zugehriges Reset-Symbol. Klicken Sie es an, um
eine Einstellung auf ihren Standardwert zurckzusetzen oder um sie zu kopieren bzw. einzufgen.
Gesperrte Bedienelemente bleiben von der Einfgefunktion unberhrt.
Das Master-Resetsymbol unten rechts im Farbkorrektorfenster lsst Sie die Farbrder fr Lift, Gamma
und Gain sowie die Einstellungen fr Kontrast, Farbton, Sttigung und Lum Mix (Luminanzmischung)
zurcksetzen. Sie knnen Farbkorrektureinstellungen in einzelne Kamerabedienfenster kopieren
oder dies fr einen durchgngigen Look fr alle Kameras auf einmal tun. Die Einstellungen fr Blende,
Grob und Schwarzwert bleiben von der Einfgefunktion unberhrt. Bei Anwendung von In alle
einfgen werden Sie durch einen Warnhinweis gebeten, den Vorgang zu besttigen. Dies soll das
versehentliche Einfgen neuer Einstellungen fr auf Sendung befindliche Kameras verhindern.
Bei Anwendung von In alle einfgen werden Sie durch einen Warnhinweis
gebeten, den Vorgang zu besttigen. Dies soll das versehentliche Einfgen
neuer Einstellungen fr auf Sendung befindliche Kameras verhindern
Blenden-/Schwarzabhebungssteuerung
Blende und Schwarzabhebung werden ber den kreisfrmigen Button im Fadenkreuz der einzelnen
Kamerabedienfelder gesteuert. Dieser Button leuchtet rot auf, wenn die Kamera auf Sendung ist.
Ziehen Sie den Button zum ffnen oder Schlieen der Blende nach oben oder unten. Bei gedrckt
gehaltener Shift-Taste ist nur der Blendenwert anpassbar.
Ziehen Sie den Button nach links oder rechts, um die Schwarzabhebung zu vertiefen oder
anzuheben. Bei gedrckt gehaltener Command-Taste (Mac) bzw. gedrckt gehaltener
Steuerungstaste (Windows) lsst sich die Schwarzabhebung separat justieren.
Zoom-Steuerung
Bei Einsatz kompatibler Objektive mit elektronischer Zoomfunktion knnen Sie Ihr Objektiv mithilfe
der Zoom-Steuerung ein- und auszoomen. Das Steuerelement funktioniert so hnlich wie eine
Zoomwippe an einem Objektiv, mit Teleobjektiveinstellungen am einen und
Weitwinkelobjektiveinstellungen am anderen Ende. Klicken Sie auf die Zoom-Steuerung ber dem
GROB-Schieberegler und ziehen Sie sie zum Einzoomen nach oben bzw. zum Auszoomen
nach unten.
Bei Objektiven, die keine elektronische Blendensteuerung haben oder keine Zoom-Steuerung ber
das SDI-Kamerasteuerungsprotokoll untersttzen, bleiben diese Einstellungen wirkungslos.
Versichern Sie sich bei Einsatz einer Blackmagic Studio Camera oder Blackmagic Studio Camera 4K,
dass die Kamera mit einem Kamerasoftware-Update in der Version v1.9.11 oder hher um Support zur
Steuerung von MFT-Objektiven mit elektronischem Zoom erweitert wurde.
GROB-Einstellung
Mit dem links vom Blenden/Schwarzabhebungs-Button angeordneten GROB-Schieberegler lassen
sich die zulssigen Blendenwerte begrenzen. Diese Funktion hilft zu verhindern, dass berbelichtete
Bilder auf Sendung gehen.
So stellen Sie den GROB-Grenzwert ein: ffnen Sie die Blende mithilfe der Blendensteuerung so
weit es geht. Ziehen Sie dann den GROB-Regler nach oben oder unten, um den optimalen
Blendenwert einzustellen. Jetzt verhindert der GROB-Grenzwert beim Einstellen der Blende, dass
Ihr optimaler Blendenwert berschritten wird.
Autofokus-Button
Jedes Kamerabedienfenster weist unten links einen Autofokus-Button auf. Klicken Sie auf diesen
Button, um bei Einsatz eines Objektivs mit elektronischer Blendensteuerung automatisch zu
fokussieren. Wichtig: Die meisten Objektive untersttzten elektronische Fokussierung. Stellen Sie
jedoch bei Objektiven, die automatisch und manuell fokussierbar sind, den Autofokusmodus ein.
Beimanchen Objektiven erfolgt dies durch Vorwrts- oder Rckwrtsschieben des Fokusrings.
Manuelle Fokuseinstellung
Mithilfe des unten in jedem Kamerabedienfensters befindlichen Fokusrings knnen Sie Ihre Kamera
manuell scharfstellen. Ziehen Sie den Fokusring nach links oder rechts, um die Schrfe manuell
einzustellen. Prfen Sie dabei anhand des Videofeeds von der Kamera, ob Ihr Bild scharf ist.
Kameraeinstellung Gain
ber die Kameraeinstellung Gain knnen Sie die von der Kamera wiedergegebenen hellen
Tonwerte verstrken. Wichtig ist dies beim Filmen bei schlechten Lichtverhltnissen, wenn eine
Verstrkung der Lichter auf dem Niveau des Sensors erwnscht ist, um eine Unterbelichtung Ihrer
Aufnahmen zu vermeiden. Sie knnen Gain abschwchen oder verstrken, indem Sie den Pfeil links
oder rechts von der Anzeige des dB-Wertes anklicken.
Bei Bedarf knnen Sie den Gain-Wert verstrken. Beispielsweise bei Auendrehs wenn Sie Ihr Bild
im schwcher werden Licht eines Sonnenuntergangs aufhellen mchten. Zu beachten ist hierbei
jedoch, dass mehr Gain auch strkeres Bildrauschen bewirkt.
Verschlusszeit-Steuerung
Die Verschlusszeit-Steuerung ist zwischen dem Farbrad und der Blenden-/
Schwarzabhebungssteuerung angeordnet. Reduzieren oder erhhen Sie die Verschlusszeit, indem
Sie Ihre Maus ber die Verschlusszeit-Anzeige schieben und den Links- oder Rechtspfeil anklicken.
Eventuelles Lichtflimmern lsst sich durch Senken der Verschlusszeit beseitigen. Durch eine
niedrigere Verschlusszeit lassen sich Ihre Bilder ohne Einsatz der Kameraeinstellung Gain
aufhellen, da der Bildsensor so lnger dem Licht ausgesetzt wird. Eine hhere Verschlusszeit
reduziert auch Bewegungsunschrfe und bietet sich daher fr gestochen scharfe Action-Shots mit
minimaler Bewegungsunschrfe an.
Weiabgleich
Die Weiabgleicheinstellung neben der Verschlusszeit-Steuerung lsst sich durch Anklicken der
beiderseits der Farbtemperaturanzeige befindlichen Links- und Rechtspfeile anpassen.
Verschiedene Lichtquellen geben unterschiedlich warme oder kalte Farben aus, was Sie durch
Anpassen des Weiabgleichs kompensieren knnen. So wird dafr gesorgt, dass die Weitne in
Ihrem Bild wei bleiben.
Klicken Sie das DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector Symbol an,
um das Farbkorrekturfenster zu erweitern und Einstellungen anzupassen
Farbrder
Die Schaltflchen Lift, Gamma und Gain gestatten die Anpassung entlang des gesamten
Tonwertspektrums, selbst in sich berlappenden Bereichen. Im fotografischen Sinne versteht man
unter Lift, Gamma und Gain die Schatten, Mitten und Lichter.
Masterrder
Benutzen Sie die Masterrder unter den Farbrdern, um die Lift-, Gamma- und Gain-
Steuerungen fr jeden YRGB-Kanal individuell anzupassen.
Kontrast-Einstellung
Die Kontrasteinstellung lsst Sie die Spanne zwischen den dunkelsten und hellsten Tonwerten in
einem Bild steuern. Die erzielte Wirkung hnelt dem Einsatz der Lift- und Gain-Masterrder,
umentgegengesetzte Anpassungen vorzunehmen. Die Standardeinstellung betrgt 50%.
Sttigungs-Einstellung
Mit der Sttigungseinstellung lsst sich der im Bild vorhandene Farbanteil erhhen oder senken.
DieStandardeinstellung betrgt 50%.
Tonwert-Einstellung
Mit der Farbtoneinstellung lassen sich alle in einem Bild auftretenden Farbtne um den gesamten
Umfang des Farbrads drehen. Die Standardeinstellung von 180 Grad zeigt die ursprngliche
Farbtonverteilung an. Die Steigerung bzw. Senkung dieses Wertes bewirkt, dass alle Farbtne
gem der auf dem Farbrad sichtbaren Farbtonverteilung gedreht werden.
Lum Mix-Einstellung
Ihre Blackmagic Studio Camera ist mit einem integrierten DaVinci Resolve Tool fr die primre
Farbkorrektur ausgestattet. DaVinci baut seit Anfang der 1980er Jahre Farbkorrektursysteme und es
werden mehr Hollywood-Spielfilme mit DaVinci Resolve gegradet als mit jeder anderen Applikation.
Das bedeutet fr Sie, dass der in Ihre Blackmagic Studio Camera integrierte Farbkorrektor eine
Reihe einzigartiger Features mitbringt, die Ihren kreativen Spielraum erweitern. Eines dieser
Leistungsmerkmale ist die YRGB-Verarbeitung.
Fr das Colorgrading knnen Sie wahlweise die RGB-Verarbeitung oder die YRGB-Verarbeitung
nutzen. High-End-Coloristen favorisieren YRGB-Verarbeitung, da diese mehr Kontrolle ber die
Farbe gewhrt, die Anpassung separater Kanle ermglicht und mehr kreative Mglichkeiten bietet.
Ein ganz nach rechts gezogener Lum Mix-Schieberegler bedeutet eine 100-prozentige Ausgabe
des YRGB-Farbkorrektors. Ist Lum Mix ganz nach links gezogen, bedeutet das eine 100-prozentige
Ausgabe des RGB-Farbkorrektors. Der Lum Mix-Regler kann beliebig weit nach rechts oder links
gezogen werden, um eine im entsprechenden Verhltnis gemischte Augabe der RGB- und YRGB-
Korrektoren zu bewirken.
Welche Einstellung ist die richtige? Das ist bei diesem rein kreativen Vorgang allein Ihre
Entscheidung. Es gibt kein richtig und falsch, denn es zhlt nur, was Ihnen am besten gefllt!
Overview
The Blackmagic SDI Camera Control Protocol is used by ATEM switchers, Blackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino Shield and Blackmagic Camera Remote to provide Camera Control functionality with
supported Blackmagic Design cameras. Please refer to the Understanding Studio Camera Control
chapter section of this manual, or the ATEM Switchers Manual and SDKmanual for more information.
These can be downloaded at www.blackmagicdesign.com/support.
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni directional stream of small control
messages embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream. Thevideo stream
containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices. Device addressing is used
to allow the sender to specify which device each message is directed to.
Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields are
packed from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are defined as,
and can be assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.
Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active region
of VANC line 16.
Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a maximum
of 255 bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to be sent with a
maximum of one frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single frame,
it should use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritize and send immediately. Lower priority
messages can be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.
Receiving devices should use the destination device address and or the command identifier to
determine which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip
irrelevant or unknown commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.
Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration
The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. Thepacket length is
Data type (uint8) used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each message
must contain an integral number of data elements.
5: UTF-8 string Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number with
5 bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional component.
128: signed 5.11fixed point The fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11.
The representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995
(15 + 2047/2048).
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to the
current parameter values. The resulting parameter value will be clamped
1: offset / toggle value according to their valid range. It is not valid to apply an offset to a void
value. Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert
that value.
Operation types 128through 255 are available for device specific purposes.
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and
Data (void)
number of elements.
The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.
trigger
.1 Instantaneous autofocus void
instantaneous autofocus
Start/stop zooming at
Set continuous specified rate: -1.0=zoom
.9 fixed16 -1 +1.0
zoom (speed) wider fast, 0.0=stop,
+1=zoom tele fast
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
destination
parameter
command
operation
reserved
category
length
type
trigger instantaneous
8 4 4 0 0 0 1 0 0
auto focus on camera 4
set exposure to 10 ms on
camera 4 (10 ms = 10000 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00
us = 0x00002710)
1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 12 0 0
Data Flow
A master device such as a broadcast switcher embeds tally information into its program feed which
is broadcast to a number of slave devices such as cameras or camera controllers. The output from
the slave devices is typically fed back to the master device, but may also be sent to a video monitor.
The primary flow of tally information is from the master device to the slaves. Each slave device may
use its device id to extract and display the relevant tally information.
Slave devices pass through the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status, so
that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge
of the device id they are monitoring.
Assumptions
Any data alignment / padding is explicit in the protocol. Bit fields are packed from LSB first.
Blanking Encoding
One tally control packet may be sent per video frame. Packets are encoded as a SMPTE 291M
packet with DID/SDID x51/x52 in the active region of VANC line 15. A tally control packet may contain
up to 256 bytes of tally information.
Packet Format
Each tally status consists of 4 bits of information:
uint4
bit 0: program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0x0)
The first byte of the tally packet contains the monitor device tally status and a version number.
Subsequent bytes of the tally packet contain tally status for pairs of slave devices. The master device
sends tally status for the number of devices configured/supported, up to a maximum of 510.
struct tally
uint8
bit 0: monitor device program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: monitor device preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0b00)
bit 4-7: protocol version (0b0000)
Slave Device
(1)
Slave Device
Monitor Device
(3)
3 ...
HINWEIS Die Blackmagic Studio Camera 2 sowie die Blackmagic Studio Camera
4K 2 haben keine integrierten Akkus.
Hilfe 195
Garantie
12 Monate eingeschrnkte Garantie
Fr dieses Produkt gewhrt die Firma Blackmagic Design eine Garantie auf Material- und
Verarbeitungsfehler von 12 Monaten ab Kaufdatum. Sollte sich ein Produkt innerhalb dieser
Garantiezeit als fehlerhaft erweisen, wird die Firma Blackmagic Design nach ihrem Ermessen das
defekte Produkt entweder ohne Kostenerhebung fur Teile und Arbeitszeit reparieren oder Ihnen das
defekte Produkt ersetzen.
Zur Inanspruchnahme der Garantieleistungen mussen Sie als Kunde Blackmagic Design uber den
Defekt innerhalb der Garantiezeit in Kenntnis setzen und die entsprechenden Vorkehrungen fr die
Leistungserbringung treffen. Es obliegt dem Kunden, fur die Verpackung und den bezahlten Versand
des defekten Produkts an ein spezielles von Blackmagic Design benanntes Service-Center zu
sorgen und hierfr aufzukommen. Smtliche Versandkosten, Versicherungen, Zlle, Steuern und
sonstige Abgaben im Zusammenhang mit der Rucksendung von Waren an uns, ungeachtet des
Grundes, sind vom Kunden zu tragen.
Diese Garantie gilt nicht fr Mngel, Fehler oder Schden, die durch unsachgeme Handhabung
oder unsachgeme oder unzureichende Wartung und Pflege verursacht wurden. Blackmagic
Design ist im Rahmen dieser Garantie nicht verpflichtet, die folgenden Serviceleistungen zu
erbringen: a) Behebung von Schden infolge von Versuchen Dritter, die Installation, Reparatur oder
Wartung des Produkts vorzunehmen, b) Behebung von Schden aufgrund von unsachgemer
Handhabung oder Anschluss an nicht kompatible Gerte, c) Behebung von Schden oder
Strungen, die durch die Verwendung von nicht Blackmagic-Design-Ersatzteilen oder
-Verbrauchsmaterialien entstanden sind, d) Service fur ein Produkt, das verndert oder in andere
Produkte integriert wurde, sofern eine solche nderung oder Integration zu einer Erhhung des
Zeitaufwands oder zu Schwierigkeiten bei der Wartung des Produkts fuhrt. BER DIE IN DIESER
GARANTIEERKLRUNG AUSDRCKLICH AUFGEFHRTEN ANSPRCHE HINAUS BERNIMMT
BLACKMAGIC DESIGN KEINE WEITEREN GARANTIEN, WEDER AUSDRCKLICH NOCH
STILLSCHWEIGEND. DIE FIRMA BLACKMAGIC DESIGN UND IHRE HNDLER LEHNEN JEGLICHE
STILLSCHWEIGENDEN GARANTIEN IN BEZUG AUF AUSSAGEN ZUR MARKTGNGIGKEIT UND
GEBRAUCHSTAUGLICHKEIT FR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK AB. DIE VERANTWORTUNG VON
BLACKMAGIC DESIGN, FEHLERHAFTE PRODUKTE ZU REPARIEREN ODER ZU ERSETZEN, IST DIE
EINZIGE UND AUSSCHLIESSLICHE ABHILFE, DIE GEGENBER DEM KUNDEN FR ALLE
INDIREKTEN, SPEZIELLEN, NEBEN- ODER FOLGESCHDEN ZUR VERFGUNG GESTELLT WIRD,
UNABHNGIG DAVON, OB BLACKMAGIC DESIGN ODER DER HNDLER VON DER MGLICHKEIT
SOLCHER SCHDEN ZUVOR IN KENNTNIS GESETZT WURDE. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN IST NICHT
HAFTBAR FR JEGLICHE WIDERRECHTLICHE VERWENDUNG DER GERTE DURCH DEN
KUNDEN. BLACKMAGIC HAFTET NICHT FR SCHDEN, DIE SICH AUS DER VERWENDUNG DES
PRODUKTS ERGEBEN. NUTZUNG DES PRODUKTS AUF EIGENE GEFAHR.
Copyright 2017 Blackmagic Design. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Blackmagic Design, DeckLink, HDLink, Workgroup
Videohub, Multibridge Pro, Multibridge Extreme, Intensity und Leading the creative video revolution sind eingetragene
Warenzeichen in den USA und in anderen Lndern. Alle anderen Unternehmens- und Produktnamen sind mglicherweise
Warenzeichen der jeweiligen Firmen, mit denen sie verbunden sind.
Garantie 196
Manual de instalacin y funcionamiento
Blackmagic
Studio Camera
Junio 2017
Espaol
Bienvenido
Gracias por haber adquirido este producto.
Estamos muy contentos de haber diseado los modelos Blackmagic Studio Camera y Micro
Studio Camera 4K. Desde adolescente, siempre tuve pasin por las producciones en directo.
Son tan emocionantes!
Las cmaras con intercomunicadores y luces piloto siempre han sido sumamente costosas
y difciles de manejar, debido a sus dimensiones considerables. Quisimos solucionar este
problema desarrollando un producto ms compacto que tuviera los mismos controles y
prestaciones de las versiones de gran tamao.
Por eso diseamos el modelo Blackmagic Studio Camera. Queramos una cmara ms
pequea que brindara una mayor portabilidad, pero generalmente las versiones de menores
dimensiones tienen pantallas diminutas. Esto no era lo que tenamos en mente. Nuestra idea
era ofrecer un visor mucho ms grande. Entonces desarrollamos esta cmara profesional
pequea con una pantalla enorme que es fantstica. Gracias a ella, resulta sumamente fcil
enfocar la imagen y ajustarla con precisin.
Asimismo, este modelo cuenta con luces piloto, conexiones para micrfonos y auriculares,
batera integrada y, por supuesto, una montura Micro Cuatro Tercios. Es todo lo que necesitas
en una solucin completa. Puedes conectar micrfonos de mayor tamao con proteccin para
el viento y alimentacin fantasma, o utilizar la cmara a kilmetros de distancia de tu mezclador
instalando un mdulo ptico SFP opcional. Incluso es posible valerse de la cmara para realizar
todo tipo de producciones en general conectndola a un dispositivo HyperDeck Shuttle.
Grant Petty
Director ejecutivo de Blackmagic Design
ndice
Blackmagic Studio Camera
ndice
Primeros pasos
Colocacin del objetivo
Para comenzar a utilizar la cmara, basta con colocar un objetivo y encenderla. A efectos de quitar
la tapa protectora de la montura, mantenga presionado el botn de bloqueo y grela hacia la
izquierda para aflojarla. Recomendamos siempre apagar la cmara antes de colocar o retirar
un objetivo.
Para colocar un objetivo:
1 El punto en el objetivo debe estar alineado con el de la montura de la cmara. Muchos
objetivos tienen un punto azul, rojo o blanco, o algn otro indicador.
2 Gire el objetivo hacia la derecha hasta que calce en su lugar.
3 Para quitar el objetivo, mantenga presionado el botn de bloqueo, gire el objetivo hacia la
izquierda hasta aflojarlo y retrelo con cuidado.
Cuando no hay ningn objetivo colocado en la cmara, el sensor queda expuesto al polvo y la
suciedad, por lo cual se recomienda mantenerlo cubierto con la tapa protectora de ser posible.
1 1
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
2 2
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
Encendido de la cmara
1 Presione el botn de encendido situado debajo de la pantalla. En los modelos Studio Camera
y Studio Camera 4K, la imagen captada por la cmara podr verse en la pantalla.
2 Mantenga presionado el botn de encendido para apagar la cmara.
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
SDI IN
REF
REF
12V
12V
Conexin a mezcladores
El modelo Blackmagic Studio Camera puede controlarse desde un mezclador ATEM mediante una
seal SDI, a fin de realizar producciones con mayor profesionalismo.
Conexin SDI
1 Conecte la salida SDI de la cmara a cualquiera de las entradas correspondientes en el
mezclador.
2 Conecte cualquier salida SDI del mezclador a la entrada SDI de la cmara. Ntese que
no es posible transmitir la seal de control a travs de las salidas destinadas al modo
de visualizacin mltiple o a la transmisin de imgenes cuya definicin original ha
sido reducida.
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
Control de cmaras
El modelo Studio Camera puede manejarse desde un mezclador ATEM mediante el mdulo de
control del programa ATEM Software Control.
Ejecute el programa ATEM Software Control y haga clic en la pestaa Cmara situada en la parte
inferior de la ventana. Ver una serie de controladores con herramientas para ajustar y mejorar la
imagen de cada cmara. La cmara 1 se denomina Cam 1. Si esta ha sido vinculada a la salida
principal del mezclador, notar que en la parte superior del controlador correspondiente a la misma
dice Al aire.
El controlador incluye diversas herramientas que permiten ajustar el color de la imagen, manejar
objetivos compatibles y modificar la configuracin de la cmara, entre otras posibilidades. Consulte
los apartados Control de cmaras y ATEM Software Control para obtener ms informacin
al respecto.
2
3
4
1
PUSH
5 2
PUSH
Panel izquierdo
2 LANC
Conexin estreo de 2.5 mm para controlar la apertura del diafragma, la distancia focal y el
enfoque en forma remota.
3 Auriculares
Conector TRS de 0.25 para supervisar el sonido mediante auriculares profesionales.
4 Micrfono
Conector TRS de 0.206 para comunicarse con la sala de control mediante auriculares con
micrfono incluido.
5 Entradas de audio
2 x XLR de 0.25 para seales balanceadas.
Consulte el apartado Blackmagic Studio Camera lateral izquierdo para obtener ms
informacin al respecto.
12
11
6 OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
7 SDI OUT
8 SDI IN
9 REF
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 18 20 21 22 10 12V
Panel trasero
11 Pantalla LCD DE 10
Permite supervisar las imgenes transmitidas por la cmara o la seal principal, adems
de ver el men. Consulte el apartado Monitorizacin para obtener ms informacin
al respecto.
12 Luz piloto trasera
Al encenderse, indica al operador que su cmara est al aire.
13 FOCUS
Presione este botn una vez para enfocar automticamente o dos veces para ver el
indicador de enfoque en la pantalla.
14 IRIS
Presione este botn una vez para ajustar la exposicin automticamente.
15 PTT PUSH TO TALK
Mantenga este botn presionado para hablar. Presinelo dos veces rpidamente para
activar el modo manos libres. Presinelo nuevamente para volver al modo normal.
16 PGM PROGRAMA
Presione este botn para ver las imgenes captadas por la cmara en directo o la seal
principal transmitida por el mezclador desde la sala de control.
17 Tabla de conversin (LUT)
Esta prestacin ser implementada prximamente.
18 Botones direccionales
Utilice estos botones para acceder a las distintas opciones en la pantalla.
REF
SDI IN
20 DISPLAY
OPTICAL OUT
21 MENU
Presione este botn para acceder al men en pantalla.
22 Encendido
Presione este botn para encender la cmara. Mantngalo presionado para apagarla.
Consulte el apartado correspondiente para obtener ms informacin al respecto.
Panel inferior
23 CONECTOR USB
Puerto USB Mini-B para actualizar el sistema operativo interno de la cmara. Consulte el
apartado Programa utilitario para obtener ms informacin al respecto.
23
1 2 4
5
6
PUSH
7
3
2
8
PUSH
Panel derecho
9 Entrada de audio analgico
Conexin estreo de 3.5 mm que admite seales a nivel de lnea o micrfono.
10 Salida SDI
Conexin para mezcladores, grabadores externos y otros dispositivos.
11 Entrada SDI
Permite controlar la cmara mediante un mezclador ATEM o una tarjeta Blackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino Shield.
12 Auriculares / Comunicacin
Conector de 3.5 mm para auriculares compatibles con equipos iPhone y Android.
Presione dos veces el botn de pausa/reproduccin en los auriculares para establecer la
comunicacin. Presinelo nuevamente una vez para interrumpirla.
10
13
11
12
Panel superior
14 Seguro para la batera
Deslice el seguro hacia adelante para quitar la batera.
Panel inferior
15 Conector USB
Puerto USB para actualizar el sistema operativo interno de la cmara. Consulte el apartado
Programa utilitario para obtener ms informacin al respecto.
14
15
Conexiones de la cmara
Blackmagic Studio Camera lateral izquierdo
Conexin LANC
Esta conexin permite controlar objetivos compatibles a distancia para ajustar el enfoque, acercar o
alejar la imagen y modificar la apertura del diafragma. Incluye un conector hembra estreo de 2.5
mm que emplea el protocolo LANC convencional.
Es posible controlar el servomotor en objetivos activos con montura tipo Micro Cuatro Tercios
mediante un controlador LANC. Actualmente, la cmara es compatible con los siguientes objetivos:
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 14-42 mm f/3.5-5.6 Power con estabilizador ptico
de imagen.
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 45-175 mm f/4.0-5.6 Zoom con estabilizador ptico
de imagen.
Olympus M.Zuiko Digital ED 12-50 mm f/3.5-6.3 EZ Micro 4/3
Olympus M.Zuiko Digital ED 14-42 mm f/3.5-5.6 EZ Micro 4/3
Entradas de audio
Las conexiones XLR admiten dos canales de audio analgico balanceado profesional. El volumen
de entrada para cada canal se puede ajustar en el men correspondiente. Las entradas permiten
utilizar seales a nivel de lnea o micrfono. El tipo de entrada se selecciona desde el mismo men.
El audio se integra a los canales 1 y 2 de la seal SDI.
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
Salida SDI
Esta salida permite transmitir seales en formato 4:2:2 de 10 bits a dispositivos SDI profesionales,
tales como mezcladores, matrices de conmutacin y tarjetas de captura. El modelo Studio Camera
HD admite seales SDI 3G, mientras que la versin Studio Camera 4K permite transmitir
contenidos SDI 12G.
Entrada SDI
Esta entrada permite al operador ver la seal transmitida por el mezclador en la pantalla de la
cmara. Basta con presionar el botn PGM para alternar entre las imgenes captadas por la cmara
en directo o la seal principal transmitida por el mezclador desde la sala de control.
Al emplear la entrada SDI en simultneo con la entrada para fibra ptica, la seal del dispositivo
conectado en primer lugar tiene prioridad. Si se utiliza el modelo Studio Camera para grabar
imgenes en un equipo tal como el dispositivo Hyperdeck Shuttle de Blackmagic, la salida de este
ltimo puede conectarse a la entrada SDI de la cmara para reproducir el material grabado.
Alimentacin
La entrada de 12-24 voltios permite conectar la fuente de alimentacin y cargar la batera interna.
Los modelos Studio Camera HD y Studio Camera 4K tienen una autonoma de 4 y 3 horas
respectivamente con la batera completamente cargada.
Los modelos Blackmagic Studio Camera 2 y Studio Camera 4K no cuentan con bateras internas.
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
REF
12V
MENU
EXPANSION
SET
Salida SDI
Esta salida permite transmitir seales en formato 4:2:2 de 10 bits a dispositivos SDI profesionales,
tales como mezcladores, matrices de conmutacin y tarjetas de captura. La cmara admite una
velocidad de transmisin mxima de 6 Gb/s. Ntese que es necesario un cable adaptador DIN
1.0/2.3 para conectar equipos con conexiones SDI comunes.
Entrada SDI
Esta conexin permite controlar la cmara desde un mezclador ATEM. Consulte el apartado Control
de la cmara para obtener ms informacin al respecto.
SUGERENCIA: El modelo Micro Studio Camera tambin puede controlarse mediante una
tarjeta Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shield. Esta permite integrar paquetes de datos en la
seal SDI proveniente del mezclador. De esta forma, al conectar ambos dispositivos a
travs de la tarjeta, es posible acceder a todas las prestaciones que brindan los modelos
de la lnea ATEM.
Personalizacin
Cable de expansin
Existen dos maneras de acceder a las prestaciones que ofrece el puerto de expansin. Una de ellas
es mediante el cable incluido con la cmara. De manera alternativa, el usuario cuenta con la
posibilidad de armar sus propias conexiones.
El cable de expansin incluye los siguientes tipos de conectores.
4 Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable
Cable de expansin
1 Alimentacin
La entrada para fuentes de alimentacin de 12 voltios incluye un conector para corriente
continua. Adems de suministrar energa elctrica a la cmara, permite cargar la batera.
Lacmara se enciende automticamente cuando se conecta a una red de suministro
elctrico.
2 Referencia
Esta entrada permite sincronizar varias cmaras segn una seal Blackburst o Tri-level.
Lasincronizacin de las cmaras con una seal de referencia externa ayuda a prevenir
errores de coordinacin que podran dar como resultado saltos en la imagen al alternar
entre distintas unidades.
3 LANC
El conector de 2.5 mm permite enchufar diversos cables para controlar ciertas funciones,
tales como el inicio y la detencin de la grabacin, la apertura del diafragma y el enfoque
manual, desde el brazo de un trpode, al utilizar objetivos compatibles.
4 PTZ
El conector RS-422 permite trasmitir al cabezal motorizado los comandos recibidos por la
cmara mediante la entrada SDI.
Personalizacin 209
5 Comunicacin B4
El conector DB-9 permite controlar y suministrar corriente elctrica a los objetivos B4
profesionales que se colocan en la cmara usando el adaptador correspondiente. Para ello,
basta con conectar el objetivo al conector DB-9 en el cable de expansin.
Es posible modificar la apertura del diafragma, el enfoque, la distancia focal y otros ajustes
de la misma manera que con un objetivo Micro Cuatro Tercios con montura activa, es decir,
mediante un mezclador ATEM o a travs de las dems interfaces de control remoto que
ofrece el cable de expansin. Consulte la pgina www.blackmagicdesign.com/support/
faq/59011 para ver una lista de objetivos B4 compatibles.
6 Servo S.Bus Digital
Al conectar la cmara a un receptor S.Bus compatible mediante un cable Futaba J,
esposible acceder a 18 canales de control remoto que pueden asignarse a diferentes
funciones. Estas incluyen el enfoque, la distancia focal y la apertura del diafragma,
entreotras. Consulte el apartado correspondiente en este manual para obtener ms
informacin al respecto.
P1 PIN ASSIGNMENT
2 S. Bus 1
2 P2
GROUND 3
GROUND 1
12 PTZ RS422 Rx- 2
8 PTZ RS422 Tx+ 3 5
9
GROUND 4 4
GROUND
5
6
3
2
8
7 P3
6
13 PTZ RS422 Rx+ 7 1
5 15
GROUND 1
10 14 B4 Lens Control Transmit 2 5
9
4 14 4
15 B4 Lens Control Receive 3
P4
9 8
3 13 3
8 GROUND 4 2
7
2
7
12 6 Power +12V in* 5 1
6
1 11 OTHER
6
* Power input to the camera is also used to power the lens. Beware of applying excessive voltages if youre using
your own power supply to avoid damage to the lens.
Personalizacin 210
Ajustes
La cmara permite ajustar el formato de la seal, la velocidad de obturacin y el balance de blancos,
entre otros parmetros, a fin de obtener imgenes de gran calidad. Asimismo, es posible modificar
la intensidad del audio, las opciones de monitorizacin y la forma en que se establece la
comunicacin con la sala de control.
Este apartado del manual brinda informacin detallada sobre cada uno de los ajustes que ofrece
la cmara.
Ajustes de la cmara
Presione el botn MENU para modificar los ajustes generales en los modelos Blackmagic Studio
Camera o Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K. Utilice los botones direccionales para resaltar las
opciones disponibles y presione el botn SET para confirmar los parmetros seleccionados.
En el modelo Micro Studio Camera 4K, es necesario conectar un monitor externo mediante el puerto
HDMI de la cmara para poder ver los mens.
Formato
La opcin Video Format permite seleccionar el formato deseado mediante los botones de
navegacin. Por ejemplo, para escoger 1080p o 1080i, presione la flecha hacia la derecha o la
izquierda y luego el botn SET, a fin de confirmar la opcin seleccionada.
Ms adelante se proporciona una lista de formatos compatibles.
Ganancia
La opcin Gain resulta de utilidad al rodar en condiciones de poca luz. El valor predeterminado es 0
dB, y este puede aumentarse en incrementos de 6 dB hasta un mximo de 18 dB.
Detalles
La opcin Detail permite ajustar al instante la nitidez de las imgenes captadas por el modelo Studio
Camera. Las opciones disponibles son Off, Low, Medium y High.
Exposicin automtica
El modelo Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K ofrece varias opciones de exposicin automtica.
Diafragma
La opcin Iris permite mantener la velocidad de obturacin y modificar la apertura para lograr una
exposicin constante.
Obturador
La opcin Shutter permite mantener la apertura y modificar la velocidad de obturacin para lograr
una exposicin constante.
Obturador y diafragma
La opcin Shutter + Iris permite mantener una exposicin adecuada ajustando la velocidad de
obturacin. Cuando no sea posible mantener una exposicin constante a pesar de haber alcanzado
la velocidad de obturacin mxima o mnima, la cmara intentar ajustar la apertura para lograr
dicho cometido.
Activacin manual
La opcin Manual Trigger permite modificar la apertura del diafragma y la velocidad de obturacin
en forma manual. El grado de exposicin podra variar segn las condiciones de iluminacin.
Balance de blancos
La opcin White Balance incluye 18 ajustes predeterminados para diferentes temperaturas de color.
2500, 2800, 3000, 3200, 3400, 3600, 4000, 4500 y 4800 K para luz de tungsteno,
incandescente o fluorescente, o condiciones de luz natural escasa, por ejemplo, al
amanecer y al atardecer, durante la maana y la tarde, o al rodar a la luz de las velas.
5000, 5200, 5400 y 5600 K para exteriores en un da claro y soleado.
6000, 6500, 7000, 7500 y 8000 K para distintas condiciones de luz diurna.
Velocidad de obturacin
La opcin Shutter Speed permite complementar el valor de ganancia al controlar la cantidad de luz
captada por el sensor. Existen 15 velocidades disponibles, desde 1/50 hasta 1/2000 segundos.
Formatos compatibles
Ajustes 212
Blackmagic Studio Blackmagic Studio Blackmagic Micro Studio
Camera Camera 4K Camera 4K
2160p23.98 2160p29.97
2160p24 2160p30
2160p25
2160p29.97
2160p30
2160p50
2160p59.94
2160p60
Ajustes de audio
Para modificar los ajustes de audio en la cmara, presione el botn MENU y seleccione el cono del
micrfono situado a la izquierda de la pantalla. Utilice los botones direccionales para resaltar las
opciones disponibles y presione el botn SET para confirmar.
Ajustes 213
Control de ganancia automtica
Al activar la funcin Automatic Gain Control, la cmara ajustar la intensidad del audio en forma
automtica durante la grabacin. Esta opcin permite aumentar o reducir el nivel de ganancia,
dependiendo del volumen de la fuente.
Entrada de audio
La opcin Audio Input permite seleccionar el audio captado por el micrfono interno de la cmara o
recibido mediante las conexiones XLR.
Volumen de entrada
Las conexiones de audio externas admiten seales a nivel de lnea o micrfono. Seleccione Mic
Low o Mic High en la opcin Input Levels segn la fuerza de la seal del micrfono. Es importante
seleccionar el volumen apropiado para asegurarse de que el audio externo pueda escucharse o
evitar que suene muy alto y distorsionado. Ajuste los niveles de entrada del audio externo mediante
las flechas.
Entrada canal 1
Mueva el control deslizante en la opcin Ch 1 Input hacia la izquierda o la derecha para disminuir o
aumentar respectivamente la intensidad del canal 1. La seal de audio externa anula el micrfono de
la cmara y se transmite a travs del canal 1.
Entrada canal 2
Mueva el control deslizante en la opcin Ch 2 Input hacia la izquierda o la derecha para disminuir o
aumentar respectivamente la intensidad del canal 2. La seal de audio externa anula el micrfono
de la cmara y se transmite a travs del canal 2.
Alimentacin fantasma
La alimentacin fantasma funciona a travs de los cables para micrfonos y es particularmente
conveniente en modelos de condensador. Active o desactive la opcin Phantom Power para ambas
entradas XLR seleccionando On u Off mediante las flechas correspondientes. Este tipo de
suministro elctrico se deshabilita automticamente al elegir la opcin Line Input Level. Asegrese
de esperar al menos 10 segundos luego de desconectar el micrfono para que la alimentacin
fantasma sea nula antes de conectar un micrfono independiente. Los micrfonos de cinta no son
compatibles con esta forma de alimentacin.
Ajustes de monitorizacin
Para modificar los ajustes de la pantalla, presione el botn MENU y seleccione el cono del monitor.
Utilice los botones direccionales para resaltar las opciones disponibles y presione el botn SET para
confirmar.
Ajustes 214
Ajustes de monitorizacin en el modelo
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K.
Indicadores HDMI
El modelo Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K brinda la posibilidad de seleccionar los indicadores
que se muestran en las imgenes transmitidas a travs de la salida HDMI.
Histograma
El histograma permite visualizar el contraste entre las luces y las sombras a lo largo de una lnea
horizontal. El extremo izquierdo corresponde a las partes ms oscuras de la imagen, mientras que el
derecho representa las zonas ms claras. Al modificar la apertura del diafragma, es posible ver
cmo los valores se desplazan hacia la izquierda o la derecha, segn corresponda.
Mediante esta opcin, es posible activar o desactivar el histograma. Una vez habilitado, aparece en
la esquina inferior derecha del monitor en uso, cuando la funcin HDMI Overlays est activada.
Audio
El vmetro digital representa el volumen de los canales de audio mediante dos barras horizontales.
La barra superior corresponde al canal izquierdo, y la inferior al derecho. Cuando la intensidad del
volumen es demasiado alta, puede ocurrir una distorsin. Para evitar este inconveniente, ajuste la
ganancia de audio en la cmara hasta que los niveles se siten dentro de los parmetros adecuados.
Mediante esta opcin, es posible activar o desactivar el vmetro digital. Una vez habilitado, aparece
en la esquina inferior izquierda del monitor en uso, cuando la funcin HDMI Overlays est activada.
Brillo
Mueva el control deslizante en la opcin Brightness hacia la izquierda o la derecha para ajustar el
brillo de la pantalla. El valor preestablecido es 60%.
Cebra
Las cmaras de Blackmagic cuentan con una funcin denominada Zebra, que indica los niveles de
exposicin en la imagen por medio de lneas diagonales, segn el nivel configurado.
Active la funcin Zebra y seleccione el porcentaje deseado mediante las flechas direccionales.
Elnivel predeterminado es Medium.
Ajustes 215
Indicador de enfoque
La opcin Focus Peaking permite cambiar el nivel del indicador de enfoque. Los ajustes disponibles
son Off, Low, Medium y High. Modifique este parmetro al utilizar un objetivo de gran nitidez para
disminuir la cantidad de puntos en la imagen. El nivel predeterminado es Medium.
Nmero de cmara
Para que la cmara pueda utilizar el sistema de sealizacin en forma conjunta con el mezclador,
espreciso identificarla con un nmero mediante la opcin Camera Number. Esto brinda la
posibilidad de garantizar que el dispositivo enve la seal a la cmara indicada. Las cmaras pueden
identificarse con cualquier nmero entre 1 y 99. El valor predeterminado es 1.
Ajustes 216
SUGERENCIA: La seal SDI proveniente de cualquier mezclador puede transmitirse a la
cmara mediante la tarjeta Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shield, a fin de que la luz piloto se
encienda cuando est al aire. Todos los modelos de mezcladores que disponen de salidas
en colector abierto son compatibles con dicha tarjeta. Consulte el apartado Conexin de
una tarjeta Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shield para obtener ms informacin al respecto.
Referencia
La opcin Reference Source permite seleccionar la fuente utilizada para la sincronizacin.
Lacmara puede sincronizarse con la seal principal recibida a travs de la entrada SDI o mediante
una fuente externa. En este ltimo caso, conviene subrayar que podra ocurrir un salto en la imagen
al realizar la sincronizacin con la cmara.
Modo de referencia
La opcin Reference Timing permite ajustar manualmente el modo de referencia segn lneas o pixeles.
Mezcla de audio
La opcin Program Mix permite cambiar el balance entre el sonido de la cmara y del intercomunicador.
La seal de audio se transmitir por los auriculares segn el modo activo indicado en la pantalla.
Porejemplo, al filmar, se escuchar el audio de la cmara. Al reproducir las imgenes transmitidas al
aire, se escuchar el audio correspondiente al programa. El valor predeterminado es 0%.
Control remoto
El modelo Micro Studio Camera 4K ofrece un men adicional denominado Remote que permite
configurar las opciones de control a distancia. Desde all, es posible asignar funciones tales como la
apertura del diafragma y la velocidad de obturacin a canales individuales en la conexin S.Bus.
Basta con seleccionar el parmetro que se desea controlar y asignarle un canal disponible mediante
los botones direccionales y el botn SET.
Ajustes 217
Modificacin de ajustes
Ajustes del objetivo
El modelo Studio Camera permite controlar el objetivo en forma electrnica, lo cual hace posible
modificar ajustes tales como la apertura del diafragma y el enfoque automtico. El indicador de
enfoque genera un borde verde alrededor de las partes ms ntidas de la imagen para facilitar el
enfoque. Es visible solamente en la pantalla de la cmara y no afecta a las imgenes grabadas.
Botn FOCUS
Al utilizar la cmara con un objetivo de enfoque automtico, presione este botn para activar el
indicador de enfoque o la funcin de enfoque automtico. Presione el botn FOCUS una vez para
activar el enfoque automtico. Oprmalo dos veces rpidamente para activar el indicador de enfoque.
Al emplear un objetivo manual, presione el botn FOCUS una vez para activar el indicador
de enfoque.
Botn IRIS
Al utilizar el rango dinmico en el modo Video, presione este botn una vez para establecer un valor
de exposicin promedio segn las partes ms claras y oscuras de la imagen. Al emplearlo en el
modo Film, oprmalo para ajustar la exposicin segn las zonas ms brillantes de la imagen. Para
ajustar la apertura manualmente, presione los botones con las flechas hacia arriba y abajo.
Ajustes adicionales
Botn PTT
Al llevar a cabo una produccin en directo, es de suma importancia que los camargrafos puedan
comunicarse con el director y con los dems integrantes del equipo en la sala de control. Para ello,
simplemente oprima este botn y mantngalo presionado mientras habla. Presinelo dos veces
rpidamente para activar el modo manos libres. Presinelo nuevamente para volver al modo normal.
Botn PGM
A veces es importante que el camargrafo vea la seal que sale al aire y no solo las imgenes
captadas por su cmara. Presione este botn para ver las imgenes captadas por la cmara en
directo o la seal principal transmitida por el mezclador desde la sala de control. La fuente externa
se puede conectar a la entrada SDI o al mdulo opcional para fibra ptica.
Botn LUT
Por el momento, no se han implementado funciones para este botn.
Flechas
Utilice estos botones para acceder a los distintos mens.
Botn SET
Permite confirmar las opciones seleccionadas.
Botn DISPLAY
Presione este botn para ver datos tiles en la pantalla de la cmara, tales como
las guas de encuadre, el nmero de cmara, el formato y la frecuencia de imagen, la
velocidad de obturacin, el balance de blancos, la duracin restante de la batera, la
ganancia y la relacin focal.
Presione este botn nuevamente para ocultar dicha informacin y ver solo la imagen. La informacin
adicional es visible solamente en la pantalla de la cmara, no as en las imgenes transmitidas
mediante la salida SDI.
NOTA: Puesto que los modelos Studio Camera 2 y Studio Camera 4K no tienen
una batera interna, el porcentaje de carga restante no se muestra en la pantalla.
Ajustes 218
Botn MENU
OPTICAL OUT
Presione este botn para acceder al men y luego utilice las flechas para desplazarse por las
distintas opciones.
OPTICAL IN
Botn de encendido
SDI OUT
SDI IN Presione este botn para encender la cmara. Mantngalo presionado para apagarla.
REF
12V
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT FOCUS IRIS SET PTT PGM LUT
DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRISSET PTT PGM DISPLAY
LUT MENU SET DISPLAY MENU
SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU
Presione el botn FOCUS una Presione el botn IRIS para El modelo Studio Camera ofrece
vez para activar el enfoque activar la funcin de exposicin prestaciones que son esenciales
automtico. Oprmalo dos veces automtica, o utilice las flechas para cualquier produccin
rpidamente para activar el hacia arriba y abajo para ajustar en directo.
indicador de enfoque. este parmetro en forma manual.
Salida de video
Conexin a mezcladores
Los modelos Studio Camera transmiten imgenes en formato 4:2:2 de 10 bits, de modo que es
posible conectarlos a mezcladores y otros equipos SDI. Por otra parte, al instalar un mdulo SFP
opcional, brindan conectividad para cables de fibra ptica, evitando de este modo la necesidad de
utilizar un dispositivo ATEM Camera Converter.
Conecte la salida principal (PGM) del mezclador a la entrada SDI de la cmara o al mdulo ptico
para ver la seal en la pantalla.
El modelo Studio Camera cuenta adems con una entrada para seales de referencia que permite
sincronizar cmaras, videocaseteras y otros dispositivos con una seal externa, ayudando de este
modo a prevenir errores de coordinacin que podran dar como resultado saltos en la imagen al
cambiar de una fuente a otra.
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
SDI IN
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
REF
SDI IN
REF
12V
12V
1 1 D2
2 2 D3
3 3 D4
4 4 D5
5 5 D6
6 6 D7
7 7 D8
8 8 D9
Este ejemplo muestra cmo programar la tarjeta Arduino para detectar una seal proveniente del mezclador
y transmitirla mediante la salida SDI, lo cual permite encender la luz piloto en la cmara correspondiente.
PUSH
2
Los puertos USB 2.0 Mini B se encuentran en la parte inferior de las cmaras.
Otros accesorios
A efectos de utilizar la cmara en un estudio de grabacin, quizs sea conveniente colocarla sobre
un pedestal y aadirle rieles para objetivos de mayor tamao o apuntadores electrnicos. En el caso
de transmisiones desde exteriores, podra ser necesario agregar micrfonos, bateras externas o
controladores remotos. La cmara incluye dos orificios roscados de 9.5 mm en la parte inferior y
diez de 6.35 mm en la parte superior y los laterales. De esta manera, ofrece la flexibilidad necesaria
para adaptarla a distintos tipos de producciones y valerse de una amplia gama de accesorios.
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
Conexin SDI
1 Conecte la salida SDI 12G de la cmara a cualquier entrada SDI del mezclador.
2 Conecte cualquier salida SDI del mezclador a la entrada SDI de la cmara. Ntese que
no es posible transmitir la seal de control a travs de las salidas destinadas al modo
de visualizacin mltiple o a la transmisin de imgenes cuya definicin original ha
sido reducida.
3 Presione el botn MENU en la cmara. Seleccione la opcin Studio Settings y luego
modifique el campo Camera Number de forma que coincida con la entrada del mezclador.
Por ejemplo, si la cmara est conectada a la entrada Cam 1, el valor tambin deber ser 1.
De este modo, es posible asegurarse de que la seal se enve a la cmara correcta.
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1 IN 3 1 1 3 1 REMOTE REMOTE
1 3 5 1 7 3 9 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH
STEREO IN
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
Conecte el modelo Studio Camera a cualquiera de las entradas SDI del mezclador.
3 1 4 2 OUT
3OUT OUT
4
L R
UT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT IN IN SDI OUT IN
L +12V
R BACKUP L L R R L L R R L R
POWER USB 2.0
OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
ANALOG AUDIO OUTAUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
OUT AUDIO OUT PGM SDI OPTICAL
MICOUT/IN H/PHONE ANALOG AUDIO OUT OP
L R
+12V BACKUP L R L R L R L R
POWER USB 2.0 OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT PGM SDI MIC H/PHONE
Control de cmaras
Ejecute el programa ATEM Software Control y haga clic en la pestaa Cmara situada en la parte
inferior de la ventana. Ver una serie de controladores con herramientas para ajustar y mejorar la
imagen de cada cmara. Los controladores son fciles de usar. Simplemente haga clic en los
botones o mantenga presionado el botn del ratn y muvalo para ajustar la imagen.
Seleccin de cmaras
La fila de botones situada en la parte superior de la ventana permite seleccionar la cmara que el
usuario desea controlar. En la ventana de ajuste del color, tambin se pueden utilizar estos botones
para seleccionar una cmara. Cuando se emplea una salida auxiliar para la monitorizacin, la seal
de la cmara seleccionada tambin se transmitir a travs de dicha salida. Esta puede seleccionarse
en el panel de ajustes generales del mezclador.
Crculo cromtico
El crculo cromtico es una herramienta til de DaVinci Resolve que permite ajustar el color en las
luces, tonos intermedios y sombras de cada canal YRGB. Para seleccionar el parmetro que desea
modificar, haga clic en una de las tres pestaas situadas en la parte superior del controlador.
Control general
El control general situado debajo del crculo cromtico permite ajustar el contraste en todos los
canales YRGB al mismo tiempo, o la luminancia de las luces, los tonos intermedios y las sombras en
forma independiente.
Ajustes de la cmara
El botn para modificar los ajustes de la cmara situado en la esquina superior izquierda del
controlador permite activar las barras de color en los modelos Studio Camera, Micro Studio Camera
y URSA Mini, y ofrece la posibilidad de ajustar los detalles de la seal correspondiente a
cada cmara.
Detalles
Este ajuste permite dar mayor nitidez a las imgenes en directo captadas por las cmaras.
Lasopciones disponibles son Desactivados, Predeterminado, Medio y Alto.
Botn de reajuste
Este botn situado cerca de la parte superior derecha de cada controlador permite seleccionar los
ajustes que se desean restablecer, copiar o aplicar. A su vez, cada crculo cromtico tambin cuenta
con un botn de reajuste. Haga clic sobre el mismo para copiar, aplicar o restablecer los parmetros
a los valores predeterminados. Cabe destacar que los ajustes de los controladores bloqueados no
se modifican al copiar y aplicar otros parmetros.
El botn situado en la esquina inferior derecha del controlador permite restablecer los valores
predeterminados para los crculos cromticos y los ajustes de contraste, saturacin, matiz y
luminancia. Es posible aplicar parmetros de etalonaje a todas las cmaras en general o a cada una
en forma individual para lograr una apariencia uniforme en las imgenes. Los valores
correspondientes a la apertura del diafragma, el enfoque, el control primario y el pedestal no se
alteran al copiar y aplicar otros ajustes. Al modificar parmetros en todas las cmaras
simultneamente, el sistema solicita una confirmacin previa por parte del usuario. De esta forma,
esposible evitar cambios en las cmaras no bloqueadas cuya seal est al aire.
Para abrir o cerrar el diafragma, arrastre el crculo hacia arriba o abajo. Al mantener presionada la
tecla de maysculas mientras se mueve el crculo, solo se modifica la apertura del diafragma.
Para oscurecer o incrementar el pedestal, arrastre el crculo hacia la izquierda o derecha.
Almantener presionada la tecla Command en Mac o Control en Windows mientras se mueve el
crculo, solo se modifica el pedestal.
Control primario
Este control se encuentra a la izquierda del control del diafragma/pedestal y permite limitar la
apertura mxima del diafragma. Es de suma utilidad para evitar que salgan al aire imgenes
sobreexpuestas.
Para limitar la apertura del diafragma, bralo completamente usando el control circular y luego utilice
el control primario para ajustar la exposicin. De esta forma, al modificar la apertura del diafragma,
dicho umbral impedir que se exceda el lmite mximo de exposicin.
Para enfocar mediante un objetivo compatible, haga clic sobre el botn de enfoque
automtico o deslice el control de enfoque hacia la izquierda o la derecha.
Enfoque manual
Para modificar el enfoque de la cmara en forma manual, utilice el dial situado en la parte inferior de
cada controlador. Deslice la rueda hacia la izquierda o derecha para ajustar el enfoque manualmente
al mirar la seal de la cmara, a fin de obtener imgenes claras y ntidas.
Ganancia de la cmara
Este control permite aumentar la ganancia de la cmara. Es de suma importancia al filmar en
condiciones de luz escasa para evitar que las imgenes queden subexpuestas. Para aumentar o
disminuir la ganancia, haga clic sobre las flechas correspondientes.
La ganancia se puede aumentar siempre que sea necesario, por ejemplo al rodar en exteriores
cuando la intensidad de la luz disminuye al atardecer y es preciso aumentar el brillo de la imagen.
Ntese que, al incrementar la ganancia, tambin aumentar el ruido en las imgenes.
Balance de blancos
Este parmetro se encuentra junto al control de la velocidad de obturacin y puede modificarse
mediante las flechas situadas a ambos lados del indicador de la temperatura del color. Permite
compensar los colores clidos o fros emitidos por diferentes fuentes de luz. De este modo,
esposible conservar la pureza de los blancos en la imagen.
Si desea acceder a las herramientas para correcciones primarias de DaVinci Resolve, haga clic sobre
el botn situado en la parte inferior, a la derecha del crculo cromtico.
Crculos cromticos
Los controles Lift, Gamma y Gain permiten realizar ajustes interdependientes pero a su vez
especficos para ciertas tonalidades. En trminos fotogrficos, dichos controles corresponden a las
partes ms oscuras de la imagen, los matices intermedios y las zonas ms luminosas, respectivamente.
Para realizar ajustes drsticos o sutiles, utilice los crculos cromticos de las siguientes maneras:
aga clic dentro del crculo y arrastre el ratn: Ntese que no es necesario arrastrar
H
el indicador de balance de color. A medida que este se desplaza, los valores debajo del
crculo cambian, reflejando de este modo los ajustes realizados en cada canal.
Mantenga presionada la tecla de maysculas y haga clic en cualquier parte dentro del
crculo: Esto permite situar el indicador del balance de color en la posicin indicada por el
puntero del ratn para realizar ajustes significativos con rapidez.
Haga clic dos veces dentro del crculo: Se restablecen los valores originales sin reajustar
el control general para dicho parmetro.
Haga clic en el botn de reajuste situado en la esquina superior derecha: Se restablecen
todos los ajustes.
Controles generales
Los controles generales situados debajo de cada crculo cromtico permiten ajustar las sombras,
lostonos intermedios y las luces en cada canal YRGB.
Mueva los controles generales hacia la izquierda o la derecha para realizar ajustes.
Contraste
Este control permite ajustar el rango entre los valores ms claros y oscuros de una imagen. El efecto
es similar al que se obtiene realizando ajustes opuestos mediante los controles generales situados
debajo de las opciones Sombras y Luces. El valor predeterminado es 50 %.
Saturacin
Este control permite aumentar o disminuir la cantidad de color en la imagen. El valor
predeterminado es 50 %.
Matiz
Este control permite modificar los matices de la imagen recorriendo el permetro del crculo
cromtico. El valor predeterminado de 180 grados muestra la distribucin original del matiz.
Alincrementarlo o disminuirlo, todos los matices se modificarn en sentido horario o antihorario en
el crculo cromtico.
Mezcla de luminancia
Las funciones de etalonaje en el modelo Studio Camera estn basadas en las herramientas para
correcciones primarias de DaVinci Resolve. Este programa fue desarrollado a principio de los aos
80 y es el ms utilizado en la produccin de largometrajes en Hollywood.
El corrector cromtico de la cmara incluye funciones sumamente tiles y creativas. Una de ellas es
el mtodo de procesamiento YRGB.
Al corregir el color, se puede emplear el mtodo RGB o YRGB. Aquellos coloristas con ms
experiencia usan el sistema YRGB, ya que ofrece un control ms preciso sobre el color y permite
ajustar los canales en forma independiente, lo cual a su vez brinda ms opciones creativas.
Cuando el control Mezclador de luminancia se desliza totalmente a la derecha, se utiliza el modo
YRGB. Si se desliza totalmente a la izquierda, se emplea el modo RGB. Asimismo, se puede
seleccionar cualquier posicin intermedia para obtener una mezcla de ambos modos de correccin.
Cul es el mejor ajuste? Esto depende del usuario, ya que el proceso de etalonaje es totalmente
creativo y no hay estilos correctos o incorrectos. El ajuste ms apropiado depende de las
preferencias del usuario y de lo que luzca bien segn su criterio.
Sincronizacin de ajustes
El mezclador transmite la seal de control a la cmara cuando ambos dispositivos estn conectados.
Si se modifica un ajuste por error en la cmara, la unidad de control del mezclador restablecer
automticamente los valores para mantener la sincronizacin.
Overview
The Blackmagic SDI Camera Control Protocol is used by ATEM switchers, Blackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino Shield and Blackmagic Camera Remote to provide Camera Control functionality with
supported Blackmagic Design cameras. Please refer to the Understanding Studio Camera Control
chapter section of this manual, or the ATEM Switchers Manual and SDKmanual for more information.
These can be downloaded at www.blackmagicdesign.com/support.
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni directional stream of small control
messages embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream. Thevideo stream
containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices. Device addressing is used
to allow the sender to specify which device each message is directed to.
Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields are
packed from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are defined as,
and can be assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.
Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active region
of VANC line 16.
Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a maximum
of 255 bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to be sent with a
maximum of one frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single frame,
it should use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritize and send immediately. Lower priority
messages can be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.
The command length is an 8 bit unsigned integer which specifies the length of
Command length (uint8) the included command data. The length does NOT include the length of the
header or any trailing padding bytes.
The command data may contain between 0 and 60 bytes of data. The format
Command data(uint8[])
of the data section is defined by the command itself.
Receiving devices should use the destination device address and or the command identifier to
determine which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip
irrelevant or unknown commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.
Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration
The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. Thepacket length is
Data type (uint8) used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each message must
contain an integral number of data elements.
5: UTF-8 string Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number with 5
bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional component.
128: signed 5.11fixed point
The fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11.
The representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995 (15 + 2047/2048).
The supplied values are assigned to the specified parameter. Each element
will be clamped according to its valid range. A void parameter may only be
0: assign value assigned an empty list of boolean type. This operation will trigger the action
associated with that parameter. A boolean value may be assigned the value
zero for false, and any other value for true.
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to the
current parameter values. The resulting parameter value will be clamped
1: offset / toggle value
according to their valid range. It is not valid to apply an offset to a void value.
Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert that value.
Operation types 128through 255 are available for device specific purposes.
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number
Data (void)
of elements.
The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.
trigger
.1 Instantaneous autofocus void
instantaneous autofocus
Start/stop zooming at
Set continuous specified rate: -1.0=zoom
.9 fixed16 -1 +1.0
zoom (speed) wider fast, 0.0=stop,
+1=zoom tele fast
0=progressive,
[3] = interlaced
1=interlaced
Steps through
availableexposure
.6 Exposure (ordinal) int16 0 n
valuesfrom minimum (0)
tomaximum (n)
[0]=file-M-rate
[1]=sensor-M-rate,
valid when sensor-
off-speed-set
[4] = flags
[2]=sensor-off-speed
[3]=interlaced
[4]=windowed mode
0=Manual Trigger,
1=Iris,
.10 Set auto exposure mode int8 0 4 2=Shutter,
3=Iris + Shutter,
4=Shutter + Iris
0.0=minimum,
.0 Mic level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0.0=minimum,
.1 Headphone level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
Headphone 0.0=minimum,
.2 fixed16 0 1
program mix 1.0=maximum
0.0=minimum,
.3 Speaker level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
Audio
0=internal mic,
1=line level input,
.4 Input type int8 0 2
2=low mic level input,
3=high mic level input
0.0=minimum,
[0] ch0 0 1
1.0=maximum
.5 Input levels fixed16
0.0=minimum,
[1] ch1 0 1
1.0=maximum
true = powered,
.6 Phantom power boolean
false = not powered
0.0=minimum,
.0 Brightness fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0x4 = zebra
Display int16
.1 Overlay enables 0x8 = peaking
bit field
0.0=minimum,
.2 Zebra level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0.0=minimum,
.3 Peaking level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0=disable bars,
Color bars display
.4 int8 0 30 1-30=enable bars with
time (seconds)
timeout (s)
0=Red,
.5 Focus Assist int8 1=Green,
[1] = focus
2=Blue,
line color
3=White,
4=Black
0=internal,
Reference .0 Source int8 enum 0 2 1=program,
2=external
BCD -
Confi- s0DDdddddddddddd
guration where s is the sign:
[0] latitude _ _
0=north (+), 1=south (-); DD
degrees, dddddddddddd
decimal degrees
.3 Location int64
BCD -
sDDDdddddddddddd
where s is the sign: 0=west
[1] longitude _ _
(-), 1=east (+); DDD degrees,
dddddddddddd
decimal degrees
10
0 = RAW, 1 = DNxHD,
[0] = basic codec
2 = ProRes
RAW: 0=Uncompressed,
int8
.0 Codec 1=lossy 3:1, 2=lossy 4:1
enum
[1] = codec variant ProRes: 0=HQ, 1=422,
2=LT, 3=Proxy,
4=444, 5=444XQ
0=Preview,
Media [0] = mode
1=Play, 2=Record
[3] = active
0=CFast card, 1=SD
storage medium
Packet
Operation Length Byte
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
parameter
command
operation
reserved
category
length
type
trigger instantaneous
8 4 4 0 0 0 1 0 0
auto focus on camera 4
set exposure to 10 ms on
camera 4 (10 ms = 10000 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00
us = 0x00002710)
1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 12 0 0
Data Flow
A master device such as a broadcast switcher embeds tally information into its program feed which
is broadcast to a number of slave devices such as cameras or camera controllers. The output from
the slave devices is typically fed back to the master device, but may also be sent to a video monitor.
The primary flow of tally information is from the master device to the slaves. Each slave device may
use its device id to extract and display the relevant tally information.
Slave devices pass through the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status, so
that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge
of the device id they are monitoring.
Assumptions
Any data alignment / padding is explicit in the protocol. Bit fields are packed from LSB first.
Blanking Encoding
One tally control packet may be sent per video frame. Packets are encoded as a SMPTE 291M
packet with DID/SDID x51/x52 in the active region of VANC line 15. A tally control packet may contain
up to 256 bytes of tally information.
Packet Format
Each tally status consists of 4 bits of information:
uint4
bit 0: program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0x0)
The first byte of the tally packet contains the monitor device tally status and a version number.
Subsequent bytes of the tally packet contain tally status for pairs of slave devices. The master device
sends tally status for the number of devices configured/supported, up to a maximum of 510.
struct tally
uint8
bit 0: monitor device program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: monitor device preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0b00)
bit 4-7: protocol version (0b0000)
Slave Device
(1)
Slave Device
Monitor Device
(3)
3 ...
Reemplazo de la batera
La batera del modelo Studio Camera no puede ser reemplazada por el usuario. En caso de que sea
necesario sustituirla, deber enviarla al centro de asistencia tcnica de Blackmagic ms cercano.
Siel perodo de garanta de la cmara ha finalizado, el reemplazo de la batera tendr un pequeo
cargo de servicio por el costo de la misma, la mano de obra y la devolucin de la cmara. Pngase
en contacto con el centro de asistencia tcnica de Blackmagic Design para obtener ms informacin
acerca del lugar donde debe enviar su cmara, cmo empaquetarla de forma segura y cul es el
costo del reemplazo en su pas.
Ayuda 243
Garanta
12 meses de garanta limitada
Blackmagic Design garantiza que el producto adquirido no presentar defectos en los materiales o
en su fabricacin por un perodo de 12 meses a partir de su fecha de compra. Si un producto resulta
defectuoso durante el perodo de validez de la garanta, Blackmagic Design podr optar por
reemplazarlo o repararlo sin cargo alguno por concepto de piezas y/o mano de obra.
Para acceder al servicio proporcionado de acuerdo con los trminos de esta garanta, el Cliente
deber dar aviso del defecto a Blackmagic Design antes del vencimiento del perodo de garanta y
encargarse de los arreglos necesarios para la prestacin del mismo. El Cliente ser responsable del
empaque y el envo del producto defectuoso al centro de servicio tcnico designado por
Blackmagic Design y deber abonar las tarifas postales por adelantado. El Cliente ser responsable
de todos los gastos de envo, seguros, aranceles, impuestos y cualquier otro importe que surja con
relacin a la devolucin de productos por cualquier motivo.
Esta garanta carecer de validez ante defectos o daos causados por un uso indebido del producto
o por falta de cuidado y mantenimiento. Blackmagic Design no tendr obligacin de prestar el
servicio estipulado en esta garanta para (a) reparar daos provocados por intentos de personal
ajeno a Blackmagic Design de instalar, reparar o realizar un mantenimiento del producto; (b) reparar
daos resultantes del uso de equipos incompatibles o conexiones a los mismos; (c) reparar cualquier
dao o mal funcionamiento provocado por el uso de piezas o repuestos no suministrados por
Blackmagic Design; o (d) brindar servicio tcnico a un producto que haya sido modificado o
integrado con otros productos, cuando dicha modificacin o integracin tenga como resultado un
aumento de la dificultad o el tiempo necesario para reparar el producto. ESTA GARANTA
OFRECIDA POR BLACKMAGIC DESIGN REEMPLAZA CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTA, EXPRESA O
IMPLCITA. POR MEDIO DE LA PRESENTE, BLACKMAGIC DESIGN Y SUS DISTRIBUIDORES
RECHAZAN CUALQUIER GARANTA IMPLCITA DE COMERCIALIZACIN O IDONEIDAD PARA UN
PROPSITO PARTICULAR. LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE BLACKMAGIC DESIGN EN CUANTO A LA
REPARACIN O SUSTITUCIN DE PRODUCTOS DEFECTUOSOS CONSTITUYE UNA
COMPENSACIN COMPLETA Y EXCLUSIVA PROPORCIONADA AL CLIENTE POR CUALQUIER
DAO INDIRECTO, ESPECIAL, FORTUITO O EMERGENTE, AL MARGEN DE QUE BLACKMAGIC
DESIGN O SUS DISTRIBUIDORES HAYAN SIDO ADVERTIDOS CON ANTERIORIDAD SOBRE LA
POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAOS. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN NO SE HACE RESPONSABLE POR EL USO
ILEGAL DE EQUIPOS POR PARTE DEL CLIENTE. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN NO SE HACE
RESPONSABLE POR DAOS CAUSADOS POR EL USO DE ESTE PRODUCTO. EL USUARIO UTILIZA
EL PRODUCTO BAJO SU PROPIA RESPONSABILIDAD.
Copyright 2017 Blackmagic Design. Todos los derechos reservados. Blackmagic Design, DeckLink, HDLink, Videohub
Workgroup, Multibridge Pro, Multibridge Extreme, Intensity y Leading the creative video revolution son marcas
registradas en Estados Unidos y otros pases. Todos los dems nombres de compaas y productos pueden ser marcas
comerciales de las respectivas empresas a las que estn asociadas.
Garanta 244
Blackmagic
Studio Camera
20176
Blackmagic Studio Camera
Tally
Tally
TallyMFT
SFP
HyperDeck Shuttle
Grant Petty
Blackmagic Design
248 268
248 269
248 270
249 270
252 271
Blackmagic Studio Camera 252 Blackmagic 3G-SDI
Blackmagic Micro Studio Arduino ShieldTally 271
Camera 4K 254
Blackmagic Camera Setup 273
256
Blackmagic Studio Camera - 256 274
Blackmagic
1
2
3
1 1
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
2 2
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
Studio Camera
248
Micro Studio Camera 4KLP-E6LP-E6N
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
SDI IN
REF
REF
12V
12V
Studio Camera
SDI
1 Blackmagic Studio CameraMicro Studio Camera 4KSDIATEM
SDI
2 ATEMSDIMulti ViewStudio Camera
SDIMulti ViewSDI
SFPBlackmagic Studio
CameraATEM
2845
ATEMATEM Studio ConverterATEM Talkback
Converter 4KATEM Converter
249
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1 IN 3 1 1 3 1 REMOTE REMOTE
1 3 5 1 7 3 9 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH
STEREO IN
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
ATEMSDI
SDIATEM
SDI
Tally
ATEM Software Control
Tally
1 ATEM Software Control
2 Studio Camera
1111
3 Blackmagic Studio CameraMENUStudio Settings>Camera
NumberStudio Camera
ATEMCam 11Tally
Tally
Blackmagic Studio CameraPGMATEM
1Studio CameraTallyTally
ATEM Software ControlCamera ControlATEM
Blackmagic Studio Camera
ATEM Software Control
1Cam 1
Cam 1
ATEM Software Control
250
Blackmagic Studio CameraBlackmagic HyperDeck Studio
Studio CameraHyperDeck ShuttleBlackmagic Video
AssistISO
Blackmagic Studio Camera
Blackmagic Studio Camera
251
Blackmagic Studio Camera
1 Tally
2
3
4
1
PUSH
5 2
PUSH
2 LANC
2.5mmLANC
3
0.25TRSPGM
4
0.206TRS
5
21/4XLR
Blackmagic Studio Camera -
252
6 /
SFP45
7 SDI
SDI
8 SDI
PGM
9
10
12 24V
Blackmagic Studio Camera -
12
11
6 OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
7 SDI OUT
8 SDI IN
9 REF
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 18 20 21 22 10 12V
11 10LCD
12 Tally
13
LCD
14
15 PTT
16 PGM
17 LUT
253
18 12V
LCD REF
19 SET SDI IN
SDI OUT
20 OPTICAL IN
OPTICAL OUT
21
LCD
22
Blackmagic Studio Camera
23 USB
USB Mini-BBlackmagic Camera Setup
23
1 Tally
-
-
-
-
Micro Studio Camera 4KTally
1 2 4
5
6
PUSH
2
7
3
8
PUSH
254
2 HDMI
Blackmagic Video Assist
1080HD
3
DB-HD15Blackmagic
Micro Studio Camera 4K
4
HDMI
5
6
7 SET
8
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
9
3.5mm
10 SDI
11 SDI
ATEMBlackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shield
12 /
3.5mmiPhone/
10
13
11
12
255
13
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4KLP-E6
14
15 USB
USBBlackmagic Camera Setup
14
15
2.5mmLANC
MFTLANC
Lumix G X Vario PZ 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 Power O.I.S.
Lumix G X Vario PZ 45-175mm f/4.0-5.6 Zoom O.I.S.
M.Zuiko Digital ED 12-50mm f/3.5-6.3 EZ Micro 4/3
M.Zuiko Digital ED 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 EZ Micro 4/3
SDI15
161516
256
SDI1516
XLR
SDI12
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
SDI
SDI10bit 4:2:2SDISDI
Blackmagic Studio Camera HD3G-SDIStudio Camera 4K12G-SDI
SDI
SDIPGMPGM
SDIBlackmagic HyperDeck
ShuttleStudio CameraHyperDeckSDI
257
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
REF
12V
MENU
EXPANSION
SET
258
EXPANSION
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
3.5mm
SDI
SDI10bit 4:2:2SDISDI
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K6G-SDIDIN 1.0/2.3SDI
SDI
SDI
ATEMMicro Studio Camera 4K
259
/
3.5mm/iPhone
/SDI
1516
4 Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable
1
12VDCMicro Studio Camera 4K
2
3 LANC
LANC2.5mm
4 PTZ
RS-422Micro Studio Camera 4KSDIPTZ
260
5 B4
DB-9Micro Studio Camera 4KMFTB4B4
B4Digital B4 Control Adapter Cable
DB-9
ATEMMicro Studio Camera 4K
MFT
Blackmagic Designwww.blackmagicdesign.com/support/
faq/59011B4
6 S.Bus
Futaba JS.Bus18S.Bus
S.Bus
P1 PIN ASSIGNMENT
2 S. Bus 1
2 P2
GROUND 3
GROUND 1
12 PTZ RS422 Rx- 2
8 PTZ RS422 Tx+ 3 5
9
GROUND 4 4
GROUND
5
6
3
2
8
7 P3
6
13 PTZ RS422 Rx+ 7 1
5 15
GROUND 1
10 14 B4 Lens Control Transmit 2 5
9
4 14 4
15 B4 Lens Control Receive 3
P4
9 8
3 13 3
8 GROUND 4 2
7
2
7
12 6 Power +12V in* 5 1
6
1 11 OTHER
6
* Power input to the camera is also used to power the lens. Beware of applying excessive voltages if youre using
your own power supply to avoid damage to the lens.
261
Blackmagic
Tally
Video Format
1080p1080i
SET
Gain
0dB6dB18dB
Detail
Studio CameraOff
Default
Medium
High
Auto Exposure
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
Iris
Shutter
262
Iris + Shutter+
Micro Studio
Camera 4K
Shutter + Iris+
Manual Trigger
White Balance
18
250028003000320034003600400045004800K
/
5000520054005600K
60006500700075008000K
Shutter Speed
Gain151/50
1/2000
263
Blackmagic Studio Blackmagic Studio Blackmagic Micro
Camera Camera 4K Studio Camera 4K
2160p23.98 2160p29.97
2160p24 2160p30
2160p25
2160p29.97
2160p30
2160p50
2160p59.94
2160p60
264
Automatic Gain Control
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
Audio Input
XLR
Microphone Level
Studio Camera
12
Input Level
Ch 1 Input1
11
Ch 2 Uses Ch 1 Input21
112SDIOn
1
1
122
Off
Ch 2 Input2
22
Phantom Power
Studio
Camera XLRAudio On
OffLine Input Level
10
LCDMENU
SET
265
- Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
HDMI MetersHDMI
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4KHDMI
Histogram
HDMI Overlays
Audio
HDMI Overlays
HDMI OverlaysHDMI
Micro Studio Camera 4KON
HDMI
IDHDMI
Brightness
LCD60%
Zebra
Blackmagic
Medium
266
Focus Peaking
OffLowMediumHigh
Medium
LCDMENU
SET
Camera Number
Studio CameraATEMTally
1991
267
Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino ShieldSDI
TallyOpen
CollectorSDIBlackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino ShieldTally
Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino ShieldTally
Reference Source
Studio CameraSDI
Reference Timing
Headset Level
50%
Program Mix
LCD
0%
268
FOCUS
Studio CameraFOCUS
FOCUSFOCUS
FOCUS
IRIS
VideoIRIS
FilmIRIS
Studio Camera
PTT
PGM
SDI
LUT
SET
DISP
Studio Camera10
Gainf
DISP10
SDI
269
OPTICAL OUT
MENU
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN Blackmagic Studio Camera
REF
12V
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT FOCUS IRIS SET PTT PGM LUT
DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRISSET PTT PGM DISPLAY
LUT MENU SET DISPLAY MENU
SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU
Blackmagic Studio Camera10bit 4:2:2SDI
SFPATEM Camera Converter
Blackmagic Studio Camera HDStudio Camera 4KStudio Camera
SDISFPPGM
Blackmagic Studio Camera
VTR
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
SDI IN
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
REF
SDI IN
REF
12V
12V
SDISFPStudio
Camera
270
Studio CameraSDIBlackmagic
HyperDeck ShuttleSSDSDIHyperDeckSDIStudio
CameraSDILCD
SDIHyperDeckSDIHyperDeckSDI
SDI
Blackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino ShieldTally
SDITallyTallyBlackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino
ShieldBlackmagic Studio CameraTallyATEM
BlackmagicSDITally
TallyBlackmagicD2-D9SDI
Blackmagic Mini Converter SDI DistributionBlackmagic
8BlackmagicTally
BlackmagicTally
TallyCommon GND
ArduinoGND
BlackmagicTally
TallyBlackmagic Arduino
Blackmagic
Arduino
1 1 D2
2 2 D3
3 3 D4
4 4 D5
5 5 D6
6 6 D7
7 7 D8
8 8 D9
SketchBlackmagic ArduinoTally1
2TallyTallySDITally
PUSH
Blackmagic Camera Setup
Mac OS X
Blackmagic Camera Setup.dmg
Blackmagic Camera Setup
1
PUSH
Windows
Blackmagic Camera SetupBlackmagic Camera
Setup
WindowsBlackmagic Design
Blackmagic Camera Setup
Blackmagic Camera SetupUSB
Mini-B USB 2.0
Blackmagic Camera Setup
Studio CameraLCD
1 Studio Camera6
2 2
LANC
3/81/4
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
DaVinci Resolve
ATEMATEMSDI
ATEMSDI
SDISDI
SFP
SDI
1 Blackmagic Studio CameraSDI OutATEMSDI In
2 ATEMSDIMulti ViewStudio Camera
SDI InMulti ViewSDI
3 Blackmagic Studio CameraMENUStudio Settings>Camera Number
Studio Camera 1
ATEMCam 11Tally
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1 IN 3 1 1 3 1 REMOTE REMOTE
1 3 5 1 7 3 9 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH
STEREO IN
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
3 1 4 2 OUT
3OUT OUT
4
L R
UT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT IN IN SDI OUT IN
L +12V
R BACKUP L L R R L L R R L R
POWER USB 2.0
OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
ANALOG AUDIO OUTAUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
OUT AUDIO OUT PGM SDI OPTICAL
MICOUT/IN H/PHONE ANALOG AUDIO OUT OP
L R
+12V BACKUP L R L R L R L R
POWER USB 2.0 OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT PGM SDI MIC H/PHONE
ATEM Software ControlCamera
YRGB
LiftGammaGain
DaVinci ResolveYRGBLiftGamma
Gain
Y RG B Lif tGammaGain
/
Blackmagic
LiftGammaGain
/
/
Shift
Maccommand
WindowsControl
Zoom
Coarse
Zoom
SDI
Blackmagic Studio CameraBlackmagic Studio Camera 4K
v1.9.11MFT
Coarse/
dB
DaVinci Resolve
CCU
Lift/Gamma/Gain
LiftGammaGain
RGB
Shift
YRGBLiftGammaGain
YRGBY
ALTCommandYRGB
Y
YRGBRGB
DaVinci ResolveYRGB
LiftGain
50%
50%
180
100%YRGB
100%RGB0100
RGBYRGB
Overview
The Blackmagic SDI Camera Control Protocol is used by ATEM switchers, Blackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino Shield and Blackmagic Camera Remote to provide Camera Control functionality with
supported Blackmagic Design cameras. Please refer to the Understanding Studio Camera
Control chapter section of this manual, or the ATEM Switchers Manual and SDKmanual for more
information. These can be downloaded at www.blackmagicdesign.com/support.
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni directional stream of small control
messages embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream. Thevideo stream
containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices. Device addressing is
used to allow the sender to specify which device each message is directed to.
Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields
are packed from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are
defined as, and can be assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.
Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active region
of VANC line 16.
Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a maximum
of 255 bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to be sent with
a maximum of one frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single
frame, it should use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritize and send immediately.
Lower priority messages can be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.
The command length is an 8 bit unsigned integer which specifies the length
Command length (uint8) of the included command data. The length does NOT include the length of
the header or any trailing padding bytes.
The command data may contain between 0 and 60 bytes of data. The format
Command data(uint8[])
of the data section is defined by the command itself.
Receiving devices should use the destination device address and or the command identifier to
determine which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip
irrelevant or unknown commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.
Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration
The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. Thepacket length is
Data type (uint8) used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each message
must contain an integral number of data elements.
5: UTF-8 string Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number with 5
128: signed 5.11fixed bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional component. The
point fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11. The
representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995 (15 + 2047/2048).
The supplied values are assigned to the specified parameter. Each element
will be clamped according to its valid range. A void parameter may only be
0: assign value assigned an empty list of boolean type. This operation will trigger the
action associated with that parameter. A boolean value may be assigned the
value zero for false, and any other value for true.
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to the
current parameter values. The resulting parameter value will be clamped
1: offset / toggle value
according to their valid range. It is not valid to apply an offset to a void value.
Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert that value.
Operation types 128through 255 are available for device specific purposes.
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number
Data (void)
of elements.
The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.
trigger
.1 Instantaneous autofocus void
instantaneous autofocus
Start/stop zooming at
Set continuous specified rate: -1.0=zoom
.9 fixed16 -1 +1.0
zoom (speed) wider fast, 0.0=stop,
+1=zoom tele fast
7
[0] time _ _ BCD - HHMMSSFF (UCT)
.0 Real Time Clock int32
[1] date _ _ BCD - YYYYMMDD
ISO-639-1 two character
.1 System language string _ _ _
language code
.2 Timezone int32 _ _ _ Minutes offset from UTC
BCD -
s0DDdddddddddddd
Confi- where s is the sign:
guration [0] latitude _ _ 0=north (+), 1=south (-);
DD degrees,
dddddddddddd
.3 Location int64 decimal degrees
BCD -
sDDDdddddddddddd
where s is the sign:
[1] longitude _ _
0=west (-), 1=east (+); DDD
degrees, dddddddddddd
decimal degrees
8
[0] red -2 2 default 0.0
[1] green -2 2 default 0.0
.0 Lift Adjust fixed16
[2] blue -2 2 default 0.0
[3] luma -2 2 default 0.0
[0] red -4 4 default 0.0
[1] green -4 4 default 0.0
.1 Gamma Adjust fixed16
[2] blue -4 4 default 0.0
[3] luma -4 4 default 0.0
[0] red 0 16 default 1.0
[1] green 0 16 default 1.0
.2 Gain Adjust fixed16
Colour [2] blue 0 16 default 1.0
Correction
[3] luma 0 16 default 1.0
[0] red -8 8 default 0.0
[1] green -8 8 default 0.0
.3 Offset Adjust fixed16
[2] blue -8 8 default 0.0
[3] luma -8 8 default 0.0
[0] pivot 0 1 default 0.5
.4 Contrast Adjust fixed16
[1] adj 0 2 default 1.0
10
[0] = 0 = RAW, 1 = DNxHD,
basic codec 2 = ProRes
RAW: 0=Uncompressed,
int8
.0 Codec 1=lossy 3:1, 2=lossy 4:1
enum [1] =
codec variant ProRes: 0=HQ, 1=422,
2=LT, 3=Proxy,
4=444, 5=444XQ
0=Preview,
[0] = mode
1=Play, 2=Record
Media
-ve = multiple speeds
backwards, 0 = pause,
[1] = speed
+ve = multiple
speeds forwards
.1 Transport mode int8 1<<0=loop, 1<<1=play all,
1<<5=disk1 active,
[2] = flags 1<<6=disk2 active,
1<<7=time-
lapse recording
[3] = active
0=CFast card, 1=SD
storage medium
Packet
Operation Length Byte
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
parameter
command
operation
reserved
category
length
type
trigger instantaneous
8 4 4 0 0 0 1 0 0
auto focus on camera 4
a d d 1 5% to ze b r a l eve l
12 4 6 0 0 4 2 128 1 0x33 0x01 0 0
(15 % = 0.15 f = 0x0133 fp)
1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 12 0 0
Data Flow
A master device such as a broadcast switcher embeds tally information into its program feed which
is broadcast to a number of slave devices such as cameras or camera controllers. The output from
the slave devices is typically fed back to the master device, but may also be sent to a video monitor.
The primary flow of tally information is from the master device to the slaves. Each slave device
may use its device id to extract and display the relevant tally information.
Slave devices pass through the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status, so
that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge
of the device id they are monitoring.
Assumptions
Any data alignment / padding is explicit in the protocol. Bit fields are packed from LSB first.
Blanking Encoding
One tally control packet may be sent per video frame. Packets are encoded as a SMPTE 291M
packet with DID/SDID x51/x52 in the active region of VANC line 15. A tally control packet may
contain up to 256 bytes of tally information.
Packet Format
Each tally status consists of 4 bits of information:
uint4
bit 0: program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0x0)
The first byte of the tally packet contains the monitor device tally status and a version number.
Subsequent bytes of the tally packet contain tally status for pairs of slave devices. The master
device sends tally status for the number of devices configured/supported, up to a maximum of 510.
struct tally
uint8
bit 0: monitor device program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: monitor device preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0b00)
bit 4-7: protocol version (0b0000)
Slave Device
(1)
Slave Device
Monitor Device
(3)
3 ...
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Designwww.blackmagicdesign.com/cn/support
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design
B l a c k m a g i c C a m e r a S e t u p
www.blackmagicdesign.com/cn/supportBlackmagic
294
12
Blackmagic Design12
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic
DesignBlackmagic Design
295
Blackmagic
Studio Cameras
2017 6
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera .
. ,
.
Studio Camera
! !
Blackmagic Design
CEO
, Blackmagic Studio Camera Blackmagic Micro Studio
Camera 4K .
. Blackmagic Camera
.
1 .
, .
2 .
3
12 , .
.
1 1
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
2 2
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
Studio Camera .
1 LCD . Blackmagic Studio Camera Studio
Camera 4K LCD .
2 .
299
Micro Studio Camera 4K LP-E6 LPE6N
.
.
Micro Studio Camera 4K .
1 .
.
2 .
. Blackmagic Studio Camera ATEM
Converter !
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
SDI IN
REF
REF
12V
12V
Studio Camera .
Blackmagic Studio Camera Micro Studio Camera 4K
SDI ATEM
.
SDI
1 Blackmagic Studio Camera Micro Studio Camera 4K SDI ATEM
SDI .
2 ATEM SDI Studio
Camera SDI .
SDI .
300
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1 IN 3 1 1 3 1 REMOTE REMOTE
1 3 5 1 7 3 9 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH
STEREO IN
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
ATEM Software Control Preference
.
1 ATEM Software Control Preferences .
2 Mapping .
Studio Camera 1 Button 1 Input
1: Camera 1 .
3 Blackmagic Studio Camera Menu . Studio Settings>Camera
Number .
Studio Camera ATEM CAM 1 1
. .
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera , ATEM
.
.
1 . Studio Camera
.
.
ATEM Software Control Camera Control ATEM Blackmagic
Studio Camera .
ATEM Software Control Camera
.
. .
1 Cam 1. . On Air
.
Cam 1 ,
. [ATEM Software Control ]
.
301
Blackmagic Studio Camera .
Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio
. HyperDeck Shuttle Blackmagic Video Assist
ISO .
. Blackmagic Studio Camera
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera .
302
Blackmagic Studio Camera
1
.
[ (Monitoring Settings)] .
2
3
4
1
PUSH
5 2
PUSH
2 LANC
, , LANC 2.5mm .
3
PGM 0.25" TRS .
4
0.206" TRS .
5
1/4 XLR .
[Blackmagic Studio Camera - ] .
303
6 /
SFP 45km /.
7 SDI
SDI .
8 SDI
PGM SDI .
9
(tri-level) .
10
12 24V .
[Blackmagic Studio Camera - ]
.
12
11
6 OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
7 SDI OUT
8 SDI IN
9 REF
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 18 20 21 22 10 12V
11 10 LCD
.
[ (Monitoring Settings)] .
12
.
13 FOCUS
,
LCD .
14 IRIS
.
15 PTT(Push To Talk)
. .
16 PGM()
.
17 LUT()
.
304
18 12V
LCD .
REF
19 SET
.
SDI IN
SDI OUT
20 DISPLAY
.
OPTICAL IN
OPTICAL OUT
21 MENU
LCD .
22
Blackmagic Studio Camera .
.
[ (Button Settings)] .
23 USB
USB B .
[Blackmagic Camera Setup] .
23
1 2 4
5
6
PUSH
7
3 2
8
PUSH
305
2 HDMI
Blackmagic Video Assist HDMI
.
1080HD , ,
. [
(Monitoring Settings)] .
3
DB-HD15 . ,
. [Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K ]
.
4 MENU
HDMI
.
5
.
6
.
7 SET
.
8
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera .
.
9
3.5mm ( ).
10 SDI
, , SDI .
11 SDI
SDI ATEM Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shield
.
12 /
3.5mm ( ). /
,
.
10
13
11
12
306
13
LP-E6 Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
.
.
14
.
15 USB
USB .
[Blackmagic Camera Setup] .
14
15
Blackmagic Studio Camera -
LANC
, ,
. 2.5mm LANC .
MFT LANC .
.
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 Power O.I.S. Lens
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 45-175mm f/4.0-5.6 Zoom O.I.S. Lens
Olympus M.Zuiko Digital ED 12-50mm f/3.5-6.3 EZ Micro 4/3 Lens
Olympus M.Zuiko Digital ED 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 EZ Micro 4/3 Lens
() .
. SDI 15
16 . 15 16
.
307
. SDI
15 16 .
XLR .
.
. SDI 1
2 .
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
SDI
SDI 10 4:2:2 , SDI ,
SDI . Blackmagic Studio Camera HD
3G-SDI Studio Camera 4K 12G-SDI .
SDI
SDI PGM() . PGM
.
SDI .
Blackmagic Hyperdeck Shuttle Studio Camera
Hyperdeck SDI .
308
REF
(Tri-level) .
.
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
REF
12V
MENU
EXPANSION
SET
309
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
. Micro Studio Camera 4K
.
.
[ ] SDI ATEM
Micro Studio Camera 4K .
.
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K DB-HD15
LANC , , , , .
,
Micro Studio Camera 4K .
[Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K ] .
SDI
SDI 10 4:2:2 , , SDI ,
SDI . Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
6G-SDI . SDI DIN
1.0/2.3-SDI .
SDI
SDI ATEM Micro Studio Camera 4K .
[ ] .
310
/
3.5mm /
. /
, . SDI 15 16
.
4 Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable
1
12V DC
Micro Studio Camera 4K .
.
2
(tri-level)
.
.
3 LACN
LANC 2.5mm
/, , .
4 , ,
RS-422 Micro Studio Camera 4K SDI , ,
.
311
5 B4
DB-9 MFT B4 Micro Studio
Camera 4K B4 . B4
Digital B4 Control Adapter
, DB-9 .
B4 , , MFT
, ATEM Micro Studio Camrea 4K
.
B4 Blackmagic Design
(www.blackmagicdesign.com/kr/support) .
6 S.Bus
Futaba J S.Bus 18 S.Bus
. , ,
. S.Bus
[ ] .
P1 PIN ASSIGNMENT
2 S. Bus 1
2 P2
GROUND 3
GROUND 1
12 PTZ RS422 Rx- 2
8 PTZ RS422 Tx+ 3 5
9
GROUND 4 4
GROUND
5
6
3
2
8
7 P3
6
13 PTZ RS422 Rx+ 7 1
5 15
GROUND 1
10 14 B4 Lens Control Transmit 2 5
9
4 14 4
15 B4 Lens Control Receive 3
P4
9 8
3 13 3
8 GROUND 4 2
7
2
7
12 6 Power +12V in* 5 1
6
1 11 OTHER
6
* Power input to the camera is also used to power the lens. Beware of applying excessive voltages if youre using
your own power supply to avoid damage to the lens.
312
Blackmagic ,
/ .
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
. [Set]
.
Micro Studio Camera 4K HDMI
.
. / 1080p 1080i
. SET .
.
(Gain)
. 0dB
6dB 18dB .
(Detail)
Studio Camera . Off
Default( ), Medium( ), High( )
.
(Auto Exposure)
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K .
(Iris)
.
(Shutter)
.
313
+ (Iris+Shutter)
.
Micro Studio Camera 4K
.
+ (Shutter+Iris)
.
Micro Studio Camera 4K
.
(Manual Trigger)
.
(White Balance)
18 .
, , , , ,
2500K, 2800K, 3000K, 3200K 3400K, 3600K, 4000K,
4500K, 4800K .
5000K, 5200K, 5400K, 5600K
.
6000K, 6500K, 7000K, 7500K,
8000K .
(Shutter Speed)
.
1/50 1/2000 15 .
314
Blackmagic Studio Blackmagic Studio Blackmagic Micro
Camera Camera 4K Studio Camera 4K
2160p23.98 2160p29.97
2160p24 2160p30
2160p25
2160p29.97
2160p30
2160p50
2160p59.94
2160p60
(Audio)
Blackmagic Studio Camera MENU
, .
, SET .
315
(Automatic Gain Control)
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
.
.
(Audio Input)
XLR .
(Microphone Level)
.
. Studio Camera
. 1 2
.
Input Level
.
Line .
Mic Low Mic High .
. /
.
Ch 1 Input
1 .
1 .
Ch 2 Uses Ch 1 Input ( 1 2)
1 SDI 1 2
On . 1
. 1 2
2 Off.
Off .
Ch 2 Input
2 .
2 .
(Phantom Power)
. On/Off XLR
. Line input
level .
10 .
.
(Monitoring)
LCD MENU , .
, SET .
316
- Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K.
.
,
. , /
.
. HDMI On
.
(Audio)
/ .
, .
.
.
.
(Brightness)
/ LCD . 60%.
(Zebra)
Blackmagic .
.
/ .
(Medium).
317
(Focus Peaking)
. (Off), (Low), (Medium),
(High) .
. (Medium).
(Tally Brightness)
. (Off), (Low), (Medium),
(High) . (Medium).
(Tally Brightness)
. (Low), (Medium), (High)
. (Medium).
(Studio Settings)
MENU , LCD .
, SET .
(Camera Number)
ATEM Studio Camera
. .
1~99 . 1.
318
, Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shield SDI
. SDI Blackmagic 3G-SDI
ArduinoShield .
[Blackmagic3G-SDI Arduino Shield ] .
(Reference Source)
. Studio Camera SDI
. ,
.
(Reference Timing)
.
(Headset Level)
/ .
50%.
(Program Mix)
. LCD
. ,
. .
0%.
(Remote Settings)
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K . S.Bus
, S.Bus
. , //SET
.
319
(Button Settings)
Blackmagic Studio Camera ,
.
. LCD ,
SDI .
FOCUS
Studio Camera , FOCUS
. FOCUS
. FOCUS .
, FOCUS .
Iris
Video , IRIS
. Film , IRIS
.
Studio Camera , / .
(Additional Settings)
(PTT)
. PTT .
. .
(PGM)
.
PGM
. SDI .
(LUT)
.
///
.
SET
.
(DISP)
Studio Camera 10 .
, , , , ,
, F .
DISP .
10 . SDI .
320
MENU
OPTICAL OUT MENU .
OPTICAL IN
Blackmagic Studio Camera .
SDI OUT
SDI IN .
REF
12V
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT FOCUS IRIS SET PTT PGM LUT
DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRISSET PTT PGM DISPLAY
LUT MENU SET DISPLAY MENU
SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU
Blackmagic Studio Camera 10 4:2:2 SDI
. SFP
ATEM Camera Converter .
Blackmagic Studio Camera HD Studio Camera 4K , Studio Camera
SDI SFP (PGM)
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera
Tri-level . VTR,
.
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
SDI IN
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
REF
SDI IN
REF
12V
12V
321
Studio Camera , SDI Blackmagic Hyperdeck Shuttle
SSD SDI . , Hyperdeck SDI Studio Camera
SDI LCD .
+12V POWER HDMI IN HDMI OUT SDI IN SDI OUT
Blackmagic
Arduino
1 1 D2
2 2 D3
3 3 D4
4 4 D5
5 5 D6
6 6 D7
7 7 D8
8 8 D9
1 2
SDI Blackmagic Arduino Shield
. .
PUSH
2
PUSH
Blackmagic Camera
Mac OS X
Blackmagic Camera Setup ,
.dmg . Blackmagic Camera Setup
.
1
PUSH
Windows
Blackmagic Camera Setup Blackmagic
Camera Setup . ,
.
Windows [] [ ] . Blackmagic
Design Blackmagic Camera Setup .
Blackmagic Camera Setup , USB
. Mini-B USB 2.0 .
Blackmagic Camera Setup ,
.
,
. , LANC
. Studio Camera 3/8
, 10 1/4 . ,
.
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
SDI
1 Blacmagic Studio Camera SDI ATEM SDI .
2 ATEM SDI
Studio Camera SDI .
SDI .
3 Blackmagic Studio Camera MENU . Studio Settings>Camera
Number .
, Studio Camera 1 ATEM Cam 1 , 1
. .
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1 IN 3 1 1 3 1 REMOTE REMOTE
1 3 5 1 7 3 9 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH
STEREO IN
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
3 1 4 2 OUT
3OUT OUT
4
L R
UT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT IN IN SDI OUT IN
L +12V
R BACKUP L L R R L L R R L R
POWER USB 2.0
OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
ANALOG AUDIO OUTAUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
OUT AUDIO OUT PGM SDI OPTICAL
MICOUT/IN H/PHONE ANALOG AUDIO OUT OP
L R
+12V BACKUP L R L R L R L R
POWER USB 2.0 OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT PGM SDI MIC H/PHONE
ATEM Software Control .
. .
.
.
, .
,
.
.
On Air
.
YRGB ,
, .
YRGB ,
// .
Blackmagic Studio Camera Micro
Studio Camera, URSA Mini
.
/
Blackmagic [ ] [ ]
.
.
.
(Detail)
.
. , ( ), ,
.
. .
/ .
.
, //
, , , .
, . ,
, , .
.
.
.
.
/
/ .
.
/ . SHIFT
.
/ . Mac
COMMAND , Windows CONTROL
.
, /
. (T), (W)
. Coarse
,
.
SDI
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera Blackmagic Studio Camera 4K ,
MFT v1.9.11
.
Coarse / ,
. .
,
/ .
.
/
. .
/ .
.
/ .
.
. (db) / /
.
.
.
.
/ .
/ / .
.
.
(White Balance)
/
.
.
.
DaVinci Resolve
CCU
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera DaVinci Resolve .
DaVinci Resolve , Blackmagic Studio Camera
.
.
, ,
.
.
DaVinci Resolve
.
// ,
. , , ,
, .
.
.
.
RGB .
Shift .
.
.
.
.
.
YRGB , ,
.
/ .
.
/ .
.
YRGB ALT Command
/ Y . YRGB
Y
. Lum Mix YRGB
Y RGB
. DaVinci Resolve YRGB
,
, .
.
. 50%.
. 50%.
. 180
.
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera DaVinci Resolve
. DaVinci Resolve 1980
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera
. YRGB .
RGB YRGB .
YRGB .
.
YRGB 100%
. RGB 100%
. / RGB YRGB .
' ? .
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera ATEM Camera Control
. Studio Camera , Camera Control
.
Overview
The Blackmagic SDI Camera Control Protocol is used by ATEM switchers, Blackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino Shield and Blackmagic Camera Remote to provide Camera Control functionality with
supported Blackmagic Design cameras. Please refer to the Understanding Studio Camera
Control chapter section of this manual, or the ATEM Switchers Manual and SDKmanual for
more information. These can be downloaded at www.blackmagicdesign.com/support.
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni directional stream of small
control messages embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream.
Thevideo stream containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices.
Device addressing is used to allow the sender to specify which device each message is
directed to.
Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields
are packed from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are
defined as, and can be assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.
Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active
region of VANC line 16.
Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a
maximum of 255 bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to
be sent with a maximum of one frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single
frame, it should use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritize and send immediately.
Lower priority messages can be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.
Receiving devices should use the destination device address and or the command identifier to
determine which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip
irrelevant or unknown commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.
Dened Commands
Command 0 : change configuration
The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. Thepacket length
Data type (uint8) is used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each
message must contain an integral number of data elements.
5: UTF-8 string Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number with
5 bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional component.
128: signed 5.11fixed
The fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by
point
2^11. The representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995
(15 + 2047/2048).
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to the
current parameter values. The resulting parameter value will be clamped
1: offset / toggle value according to their valid range. It is not valid to apply an offset to a void
value. Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert
that value.
Operation types 128through 255 are available for device specific purposes.
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and
Data (void)
number of elements.
The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.
trigger
.1 Instantaneous autofocus void
instantaneous autofocus
Start/stop zooming at
Set continuous specified rate: -1.0=zoom
.9 fixed16 -1 +1.0
zoom (speed) wider fast, 0.0=stop,
+1=zoom tele fast
1
[0] = frame rate 24, 25, 30, 50, 60
[1] = M-rate 0=regular, 1=M-rate
0=NTSC, 1=PAL, 2=720,
[2] =
3=1080, 4=2k, 5=2k DCI,
dimensions
.0 Video mode int8 6=4k, 7=4k DCI
0=progressive,
[3] = interlaced
1=interlaced
[4] =
0=YUV
colour space
.1 Sensor Gain int8 1 16 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x gain
int16 color temp 2500 10000 Colour temperature in K
.2 Manual White Balance
int16 tint -50 50 tint
Calculate and set auto
.3 Set auto WB void
white balance
Use latest auto white
.4 Restore auto WB void
balance setting
.5 Exposure (us) int32 1 42000 time in us
Steps through
availableexposure
.6 Exposure (ordinal) int16 0 n
valuesfrom minimum (0)
tomaximum (n)
int8
.7 Dynamic Range Mode 0 1 0 = film, 1 = video
enum
Video int8
.8 Video sharpening level 0 3
enum
fps as integer
[0] = file
(eg 24, 25, 30,
frame rate
50, 60, 120)
fps as integer, valid when
sensor-off-speed set
[1] = sensor (eg 24,25, 30, 33, 48, 50,
frame rate 60, 120), no change will
beperformed if this
value is set to 0
[2] =
in pixels
.9 Recording format int16 frame width
[3] =
in pixels
frame height
[0]=file-M-rate
[1]=sensor-M-rate,
valid when sensor-
[4] = flags off-speed-set
[2]=sensor-off-speed
[3]=interlaced
[4]=windowed mode
0=Manual Trigger,
1=Iris,
Set auto
.10 int8 0 4 2=Shutter,
exposure mode
3=Iris + Shutter,
4=Shutter + Iris
2
0.0=minimum,
.0 Mic level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0.0=minimum,
.1 Headphone level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
Headphone 0.0=minimum,
.2 fixed16 0 1
program mix 1.0=maximum
0.0=minimum,
.3 Speaker level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
Audio
0=internal mic,
1=line level input,
.4 Input type int8 0 2
2=low mic level input,
3=high mic level input
0.0=minimum,
[0] ch0 0 1
1.0=maximum
.5 Input levels fixed16
0.0=minimum,
[1] ch1 0 1
1.0=maximum
true = powered,
.6 Phantom power boolean
false = not powered
3
bit flags: [0] = display
status, [1] = display
frame guides
uint16
.0 Overlay enables Some cameras don't
bit field
allow separate control of
frame guides and
status overlays.
0=off, 1=2.4:1, 2=2.39:1,
Frame guides style [0] = frame
.1 int8 0 8 3=2.35:1, 4=1.85:1, 5=16:9,
(Camera 3.x) guides style
Output 6=14:9, 7=4:3
Frame guides opacity [1] = frame 0.0=transparent,
.2 fixed16 0.1 1
(Camera 3.x) guide opacity 1.0=opaque
0=off, 1=2.4:1, 2=2.39:1,
[0] = frame
3=2.35:1, 4=1.85:1, 5=16:9,
guides style
6=14:9, 7=4:3
Overlays
(replaces .1 and .2 [1] = frame 0=transparent,
.3 int8 0 100
abovefrom guide opacity 100=opaque
Cameras 4.0)
percentage of full frame
[2] = safe area
0 100 used by safe area guide
percentage
(0 means off)
4
0.0=minimum,
.0 Brightness fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0x4 = zebra
Display int16
.1 Overlay enables 0x8 = peaking
bit field
0.0=minimum,
.2 Zebra level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
7
[0] time _ _ BCD - HHMMSSFF (UCT)
.0 Real Time Clock int32
[1] date _ _ BCD - YYYYMMDD
ISO-639-1 two character
.1 System language string _ _ _
language code
.2 Timezone int32 _ _ _ Minutes offset from UTC
BCD -
s0DDdddddddddddd
Confi- where s is the sign:
guration [0] latitude _ _ 0=north (+), 1=south (-);
DD degrees,
dddddddddddd
decimal degrees
.3 Location int64
BCD -
sDDDdddddddddddd
where s is the sign:
[1] longitude _ _ 0=west (-), 1=east (+);
DDD degrees,
dddddddddddd
decimal degrees
8
[0] red -2 2 default 0.0
[1] green -2 2 default 0.0
.0 Lift Adjust fixed16
[2] blue -2 2 default 0.0
[3] luma -2 2 default 0.0
[0] red -4 4 default 0.0
[1] green -4 4 default 0.0
.1 Gamma Adjust fixed16
[2] blue -4 4 default 0.0
[3] luma -4 4 default 0.0
[0] red 0 16 default 1.0
[1] green 0 16 default 1.0
.2 Gain Adjust fixed16
Colour [2] blue 0 16 default 1.0
Correction [3] luma 0 16 default 1.0
[0] red -8 8 default 0.0
[1] green -8 8 default 0.0
.3 Offset Adjust fixed16
[2] blue -8 8 default 0.0
[3] luma -8 8 default 0.0
[0] pivot 0 1 default 0.5
.4 Contrast Adjust fixed16
[1] adj 0 2 default 1.0
Packet
Operation Length Byte
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
parameter
command
operation
reserved
category
length
type
trigger instantaneous
8 4 4 0 0 0 1 0 0
auto focus on camera 4
set exposure to 10 ms on
camera 4 (10 ms = 10000 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00
us = 0x00002710)
1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 12 0 0
Data Flow
A master device such as a broadcast switcher embeds tally information into its program feed
which is broadcast to a number of slave devices such as cameras or camera controllers. The
output from the slave devices is typically fed back to the master device, but may also be sent
to a video monitor.
The primary flow of tally information is from the master device to the slaves. Each slave device
may use its device id to extract and display the relevant tally information.
Slave devices pass through the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status,
so that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without
knowledge of the device id they are monitoring.
Assumptions
Any data alignment / padding is explicit in the protocol. Bit fields are packed from LSB first.
Blanking Encoding
One tally control packet may be sent per video frame. Packets are encoded as a SMPTE 291M
packet with DID/SDID x51/x52 in the active region of VANC line 15. A tally control packet may
contain up to 256 bytes of tally information.
Packet Format
Each tally status consists of 4 bits of information:
uint4
bit 0: program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0x0)
The first byte of the tally packet contains the monitor device tally status and a version number.
Subsequent bytes of the tally packet contain tally status for pairs of slave devices. The master
device sends tally status for the number of devices configured/supported, up to a
maximum of 510.
struct tally
uint8
bit 0: monitor device program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: monitor device preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0b00)
bit 4-7: protocol version (0b0000)
Slave Device
(1)
Slave Device
Monitor Device
(3)
3 ...
Blackmagic Design
, Blackmagic
(www.blackmagicdesign.com/kr/support) .
Blackmagic Design
[ ]
. ,
[ ] Blackmagic Design
.
Blackmagic Camera Setup [About Blackmagic
Camera Setup] .
Mac OS X [Blackmagic Camera Setup]
. [About Blackmagic Camera Setup]
.
Windows Blackmagic Camera Setup
. [About Blackmagic Camera Setup]
.
Blackmagic Camera Setup , Blackmagic Design
(www.blackmagicdesign.com/kr/support)
. ,
.
Studio Camera .
Blackmagic Design .
,
. Blackmagic Design
, .
345
12
Blackmagic Design 12
. , Blackmagic Design
.
Blackmagic Design
. Blackmagic Design
, .
, , , ,
.
, , , .
Blackmagic Design . a) Blackmagic
Design . b)
. c) Blackmagic Design
. d)
. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN
. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN
.
BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN
, ,
, . BLACKMAGIC DESIGN
. BLACKMAGIC
.
.
Copyright 2017 Blackmagic Design. . Blackmagic Design, DeckLink, HDLink, Workgroup Videohub,
Multibridge Pro, Multibridge Extreme, Intensity, Leading the creative video revolution
. .
346
Blackmagic
2017 .
!
Blackmagic Studio Camera.
, .
, .
,
MFT. Blackmagic Studio Camera
.
, SFP,
.
HyperDeck Shuttle.
, .
!
Grant Petty
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic
341 358
341 Studio 360
341 Remote 361
342 362
345 363
Blackmagic Studio Camera 345 363
Blackmagic Micro 364
Studio Camera 4K 347 Tally-
349
Blackmagic3G-SDI Arduino Shield 364
Blackmagic Studio Camera
349 Blackmagic Camera Setup 366
Blackmagic Studio Camera
367
350
367
Blackmagic Micro Studio
Camera 4K 351 367
Blackmagic Micro Studio ATEM Software Control 367
Camera 4K 352
367
353
369
DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector 374
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K 353
Developer Information 377
Blackmagic SDI Camera Control Protocol 377
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K 354 Blackmagic Embedded
TallyControl Protocol 385
355
Camera 355 387
Blackmagic Studio Camera Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
. ,
.
.
1 . ,
.
2 .
3 , ,
12 ,
.
, ,
.
1 1
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
2 2
1
1
PUSH
PUSH
3
3
2
(Studio Camera)
1 -. Blackmagic Studio Camera Studio Camera
4K .
2 , .
341
Micro Studio Camera 4K LP-E6 LP-E6N,
.
.
.
Micro Studio Camera 4K.
1 .
.
2 , .
.
ATEMConverter, .
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
SDI IN
REF
REF
12V
12V
Studio Camera,
ATEM SDI- Blackmagic Studio
Camera Micro Studio Camera 4K,
.
SDI
1 SDI- (Out) Blackmagic Studio Camera Micro Studio Camera 4K
SDI- (In) ATEM.
2 SDI- ATEM ( ,
) SDI- .
SDI-
.
. SFP- Blackmagic
Studio Camera ATEM
. 45 .
ATEM ATEM Studio Converter
ATEM Talkback Converter 4K. .
ATEM Converter.
342
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1 IN 3 1 1 3 1 REMOTE REMOTE
1 3 5 1 7 3 9 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH
STEREO IN
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
Tally-
ATEM Software Control Preferences ,
.
1 ATEM Software Control Preferences.
2 Mapping ,
. , Studio Camera 1 ,
Button 1 Input 1: Camera 1.
3 MENU Blackmagic Studio Camera. Studio Settings>Camera Number
. ,
Studio Camera 1 Cam 1 ATEM, Camera Number
1.
.
. PGM
Blackmagic Studio Camera,
ATEM. ,
.
Camera 1 . Studio Camera
. , ,
.
ATEM Software Control Blackmagic Studio
ATEM.
ATEM Software Control Camera
, .
,
. Camera 1 Cam 1. ,
On Air.
Cam 1 ,
. .
ATEM Software Control.
343
, Blackmagic Studio Camera
, Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio.
, HyperDeck Shuttle Blackmagic Video
Assist .
! Blackmagic Studio Camera ,
.
.
344
Blackmagic Studio Camera
1
, . .
.
2
3
4
1
PUSH
5 2
PUSH
2 LANC
2,5 ,
LANC.
3
TRS 0,25
.
4
TRS 0,206
.
5
XLR 1/4 .
. Blackmagic Studio Camera .
345
6 OPTICAL IN/OUT
45
SFP.
7 SDI OUT
SDI .
8 SDI IN
SDI (PGM).
9 REF
c blackburst tri-level.
10
1224
( ).
. Blackmagic Studio Camera .
12
11
6 OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
7 SDI OUT
8 SDI IN
9 REF
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 18 20 21 22 10 12V
11 10- -
,
. . .
12
. , .
13 FOCUS
-.
14 IRIS
.
15 PTT
.
. .
16 PGM
PGM
.
17 LUT
.
346
12V
18 REF
-.
SDI IN
19 SET
SDI OUT
.
OPTICAL IN
20 DISPLAY
OPTICAL OUT
.
21 MENU
-.
22
, Blackmagic Studio Camera. ,
.
. .
23 USB
USB Mini-B . . "Blackmagic Camera Setup".
23
1 2 4
5
6
7
3
PUSH
2 8
PUSH
347
2 HDMI
HDMI , Blackmagic Video
Assist, .
1080HD.
, . .
.
3
DB-HD15.
, . .
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K.
4 MENU
HDMI-.
5
.
6
.
7 SET
.
8
, Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K.
, .
9
3,5 .
10 SDI OUT
SDI , .
11 SDI IN
SDI Blackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino Shield.
12
3,5 iPhone- Android-
. /
, .
10
13
11
12
348
13
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K LP-E6,
.
.
14
, .
15 USB
USB . . "Blackmagic Camera Setup".
14
15
Blackmagic Studio Camera
LANC
LANC , ,
.
2,5 LANC.
MFT
. :
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 Power O.I.S.
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 45-175mm f/4.0-5.6 Zoom O.I.S.
Olympus M.Zuiko Digital ED 12-50mm f/3.5-6.3 EZ Micro 4/3
Olympus M.Zuiko Digital ED 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 EZ Micro 4/3
. ,
. 15 16 SDI-
. , .
349
.
15 16 SDI-.
XLR
. ,
.
. . SDI-
1 2.
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
SDI OUT
SDI 10- 4:2:2 SDI-,
, , . Blackmagic Studio
Camera HD 3G-SDI, Studio Camera 4K 12G-SDI.
SDI IN
SDI (PGM).
PGM
.
SDI- ,
, . Studio Camera
, Blackmagic Hyperdeck Shuttle, Hyperdeck
SDI, .
350
blackburst
tri-level. ,
.
1224
Blackmagic Studio Camera HD Blackmagic Studio Camera 4K. Studio Camera
HD , Studio Camera 4K .
Blackmagic Studio Camera 2 Studio Camera 4K 2 .
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
SDI IN
REF
12V
MENU
EXPANSION
SET
351
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
. ,
.
.
Micro Studio Camera 4K SDI-
(. ).
.
DB-HD15 Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
, LANC ,
.
.
. Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K.
SDI OUT
SDI 10- 4:2:2 SDI-,
, , . Blackmagic Micro
Studio Camera 4K 6G-SDI. SDI-
DIN 1.0/2.3.
SDI IN
SDI Micro Studio Camera 4K .
. .
352
3,5 iPhone- Android-
. /
. 15 16
SDI-.
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
. ,
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K, .
.
4 Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable Micro Studio Cam MSC Breakout Cable
1
12 Micro Studio Camera 4K
.
.
2
blackburst
tri-level. ,
.
3 LANC
2,5 LANC- .
,
.
4 , ,
RS-422 SDI-,
Micro Studio Camera 4K.
353
5 B4-
DB-9 4,
Micro Studio Camera 4K MFT/B4.
, DB-9
B4 Control Adapter Cable.
, , MFT-
Camera Control
Micro Studio Camera 4K. B4-
- Blackmagic Design www.blackmagicdesign.com/support/
faq/59011.
6 S.Bus
18 ,
S.Bus- Futaba J.
, , .
S.Bus . Remote.
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
, 4,
12 . ,
.
. .
1, . 2-7.
P1 PIN ASSIGNMENT
2 S. Bus 1
2 P2
GROUND 3
GROUND 1
12 PTZ RS422 Rx- 2
8 PTZ RS422 Tx+ 3 5
9
GROUND 4 4
GROUND
5
6
3
2
8
7 P3
6
13 PTZ RS422 Rx+ 7 1
5 15
GROUND 1
10 14 B4 Lens Control Transmit 2 5
9
4 14 4
15 B4 Lens Control Receive 3
P4
9 8
3 13 3
8 GROUND 4 2
7
2
7
12 6 Power +12V in* 5 1
6
1 11 OTHER
6
* Power input to the camera is also used to power the lens. Beware of applying excessive voltages if youre using
your own power supply to avoid damage to the lens.
354
Blackmagic , ,
, ,
.
.
Camera
Blackmagic Studio Camera Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
MENU. , ,
SET.
Micro Studio Camera 4K
HDMI .
. ,
1080p 1080i .
SET.
.
Gain
.
0 , 18 6 .
Detail
.
, : Off (.),
Default (.), Medium (.) High (.).
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
.
Iris
.
Shutter
.
355
Camera Blackmagic Studio Camera
Iris + Shutter
.
, Micro Studio Camera 4K .
Shutter + Iris
.
,
Micro Studio Camera 4K .
Manual Trigger
,
.
White Balance ( )
18
.
2500, 2800, 3000, 3200, 3400, 3600, 4000, 4500 4800K
, ,
, , ,
;
5000, 5200, 5400 5600K ;
6000, 6500, 7000, 7500 8000K
.
Shutter Speed ( )
, ,
Gain. 15 1/50 1/2000 .
Camera Blackmagic
Micro Studio Camera 4K
2160p/23,98 2160p/29,97
2160p/24 2160p/30
2160p/25
2160p/29,97
2160p/30
2160p/50
2160p/59,94
2160p/60
AUDIO
Blackmagic Studio Camera,
MENU .
,
SET.
357
Automatic Gain Control
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
. , ,
.
Audio Input
XLR.
Microphone Level ( )
.
. Studio
Camera . ,
1 2.
Input Level ( )
. , ,
Line.
Mic Low Mic High. ,
. .
Ch 1 Input ( 1)
1 .
1,
.
Ch 2 Uses Ch 1 Input ( 1 2)
, , 1,
1 2 SDI- .
, ,
. ,
.
Ch 2 Input ( 2)
2 .
2,
.
Phantom Power ( )
. XLR-, Audio
On (.) Off (.). Line
Input Level . Phantom
Power 10
. .
-, MENU
. ,
SET.
358
Monitoring
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
HDMI Meters
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
HDMI-.
.
, .
.
. ,
.
HDMI Overlays On.
Audio
. , .
. ,
.
. ,
.
HDMI Overlays On.
HDMI Overlays
Micro Studio Camera 4K. On,
HDMI- , ,
, HDMI Meters.
Brightness
- .
60%.
Zebra ()
Blackmagic Zebra, .
, , .
.
.
359
Focus Peaking ( )
.
: Off (.), Low (.), Medium (.) High (.).
, .
.
Studio
, MENU
. ,
SET.
Camera Number ( )
ATEM Studio Camera,
.
. 1 99. 1.
360
.
Tally-, Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino
Shield. SDI-, ,
Blackmagic 3G-SDI ArduinoShield.
. Tally-
Blackmagic3G-SDI Arduino Shield.
Reference Source ( )
. Studio Camera
SDI .
,
- .
Reference Timing ( )
.
Headset Level ( )
.
50%.
Program Mix
.
, -. ,
.
, .
0%.
Remote
Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera 4K
. S.Bus S.Bus
, .
, , SET.
361
Blackmagic Studio Camera ,
.
, .
- SDI-.
Focus
Studio Camera , FOCUS
.
FOCUS.
FOCUS.
,
FOCUS .
IRIS
. IRIS
. ,
.
PTT
. .
. .
PGM
,
.
.
SDI- .
LUT
.
, , ,
.
SET
.
DISPLAY
, 10- :
, ,
, , , , ,
.
, DISP .
10- SDI-.
362
MENU
OPTICAL OUT
.
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
REF
12V
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT FOCUS IRIS SET PTT PGM LUT
DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRISSET PTT PGM DISPLAY
LUT MENU SET DISPLAY MENU
SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT
FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU FOCUS IRIS PTT PGM LUT SET DISPLAY MENU
Blackmagic Studio Camera 10- 4:2:2 ,
SDI-.
SFP ,
ATEM Camera Converter.
Blackmagic Studio Camera HD Studio Camera 4K
SDI- ,
SFP.
Blackmagic Studio Camera
blackburst tri-level. ,
,
.
OPTICAL OUT
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
OPTICAL OUT
SDI IN
OPTICAL IN
SDI OUT
REF
SDI IN
REF
12V
12V
Studio Camera ,
SDI- SFP
363
Studio Camera,
SDI- Blackmagic HyperDeck Shuttle.
SDI- Studio Camera, - .
SDI-
SDI- HyperDeck
Tally-
Blackmagic3G-SDI
Arduino Shield
ATEM, SDI-, Blackmagic Studio Camera
.
, Tally- Blackmagic 3G-SDI
Arduino Shield.
Tally- D2-D9 Blackmagic,
SDI- Blackmagic -,
Blackmagic Mini Converter SDI Distribution.
.
Blackmagic Tally- .
. GND
GND Arduino.
, Blackmagic Tally-
Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino Shield.
Blackmagic Arduino
1 1 D2
2 2 D3
3 3 D4
4 4 D5
5 5 D6
6 6 D7
7 7 D8
8 8 D9
PUSH
2
1
PUSH
Windows
Blackmagic Camera Setup
Blackmagic Camera Setup.
.
.
Blackmagic
Blackmagic Design.
Blackmagic Camera Setup
USB. Mini-B USB 2.0 .
Blackmagic Camera Setup
.
.
, LANC- .
3/8 1/4
.
.
1
1
PUSH
3
2
2
1
PUSH
3
2
SDI
1 SDI- Blackmagic Studio Camera SDI- .
2 SDI- ATEM ( ,
) SDI- . SDI-
.
3 MENU Blackmagic Studio Camera. Studio Settings>Camera Number
. ,
Studio Camera 1 Cam 1 ATEM, Camera Number
1.
.
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 1 IN 3 1 1 3 1 REMOTE REMOTE
1 3 5 1 7 3 9 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH
STEREO IN
CONTROL CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 IN 2 2 HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD
1 2 4 1 6 2 8 4 10 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 REF IN
PREVIEW AUXPROGRAM
1-3 PREVIEW
OUTPUTS PROGRAM OUTPUTS
MULTI-VIEW MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN
IN IN IN IN IN 1 3 1 REMOTE
All SDI and HDMI video connections are
1 3 5 7 9 STEREO IN PUSH PUSH SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
CONTROL
IN IN IN IN IN IN 2 2 HD HD HD
1 2 4 6 8 10
CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2
USB 2.0 HDMI IN
SDI INPUTS REF IN AUX 1-3 PREVIEW PROGRAM OUTPUTS MULTI-VIEW ANALOG AUDIO IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT
3 1 4 2 OUT
3OUT OUT
4
L R
UT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT SDI OUT IN IN SDI OUT IN
L +12V
R BACKUP L L R R L L R R L R
POWER USB 2.0
OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
ANALOG AUDIO OUTAUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG
OUT AUDIO OUT PGM SDI OPTICAL
MICOUT/IN H/PHONE ANALOG AUDIO OUT OP
L R
+12V BACKUP L R L R L R L R
POWER USB 2.0 OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO OUT PGM SDI MIC H/PHONE
Blackmagic Studio
ATEM Studio Converter
ATEM Software Control Camera
. ,
.
.
, .
,
.
, . AUX
.
,
, .
,
,
YRGB-.
DaVinci Resolve.
, ,
YRGB. ,
.
YRGB : ,
.
Camera
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera, Micro Studio Camera URSA
Mini, .
/
Blackmagic ,
Show () Hide ().
,
.
Detail
.
, : Off (.), Default (.),
Medium (.) High (.).
, , .
. ,
/ . Paste ()
.
, ,
,
Contrast, Hue, Saturation Lum Mix.
,
. Paste () , ,
Coarse . Paste to all ( ) ,
.
, .
Paste to all ( ) ,
.
, .
/
/
. , .
, .
Shift, .
,
. Command ( Mac) Control ( Windows),
.
Zoom Control. , ,
.
Coarse , , , .
SDI-, .
Blackmagic Studio Camera Blackmagic Studio Camera 4K MFT-
1.9.11 .
Coarse
Coarse /
.
.
Coarse,
, Coarse
. Coarse
.
/
. Coarse.
,
.
.
.
,
, .
dB.
,
. , .
/ . ,
, .
.
, ,
. ,
,
.
White Balance ( )
,
( ).
.
Lift/Gamma/Gain
. ,
.
.
, .
RGB ,
.
Shift .
, ,
.
.
.
Reset, .
.
, , ,
YRGB.
.
,
. YRGB
. (Y)
ALT Command.
YRGB,
. ,
Lum Mix .
YRGB, RGB.
, ,
.
, .
Contrast
. ,
Lift Gain, .
50%.
Saturation
.
50%.
Hue
Hue .
180 , .
.
Lum Mix
Blackmagic Studio Camera DaVinci
Resolve. DaVinci 80- . ,
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera
. YRGB.
RGB YRGB.
YRGB,
.
Lum Mix , 100%
YRGB. Lum Mix , 100%
RGB. Lum Mix
, RGB YRGB.
,
.
ATEM Blackmagic
Studio Camera. - ,
.
Overview
The Blackmagic SDI Camera Control Protocol is used by ATEM switchers, Blackmagic 3G-SDI Arduino
Shield and Blackmagic Camera Remote to provide Camera Control functionality with supported
Blackmagic Design cameras. Please refer to the Understanding Studio Camera Control chapter
section of this manual, or the ATEM Switchers Manual and SDKmanual for more information. These
can be downloaded at www.blackmagicdesign.com/support.
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni directional stream of small control
messages embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream. Thevideo stream
containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices. Device addressing is used
to allow the sender to specify which device each message is directed to.
Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields are
packed from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are defined as,
and can be assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.
Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active region of
VANC line 16.
Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a maximum of
255 bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to be sent with a
maximum of one frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single frame,
itshould use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritize and send immediately. Lower priority
messages can be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.
Receiving devices should use the destination device address and or the command identifier to
determine which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip
irrelevant or unknown commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.
Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration
The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. Thepacket length is
Data type (uint8) used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each message
must contain an integral number of data elements.
5: UTF-8 string Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number with 5
bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional component. The
128: signed 5.11fixed point
fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11. The
representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995 (15 + 2047/2048).
The supplied values are assigned to the specified parameter. Each element
will be clamped according to its valid range. A void parameter may only be
0: assign value assigned an empty list of boolean type. This operation will trigger the
action associated with that parameter. A boolean value may be assigned
the value zero for false, and any other value for true.
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to the
current parameter values. The resulting parameter value will be clamped
1: offset / toggle value according to their valid range. It is not valid to apply an offset to a void
value. Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert
that value.
Operation types 128through 255 are available for device specific purposes.
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and
Data (void)
number of elements.
The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.
trigger
.1 Instantaneous autofocus void
instantaneous autofocus
Start/stop zooming at
Set continuous specified rate: -1.0=zoom
.9 fixed16 -1 +1.0
zoom (speed) wider fast, 0.0=stop,
+1=zoom tele fast
1
[0] = frame rate 24, 25, 30, 50, 60
[1] = M-rate 0=regular, 1=M-rate
0=NTSC, 1=PAL, 2=720,
[2] = dimensions 3=1080, 4=2k, 5=2k DCI,
.0 Video mode int8 6=4k, 7=4k DCI
0=progressive,
[3] = interlaced
1=interlaced
[4] =
0=YUV
colour space
.1 Sensor Gain int8 1 16 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x gain
int16 color temp 2500 10000 Colour temperature in K
.2 Manual White Balance
int16 tint -50 50 tint
Calculate and set auto
.3 Set auto WB void
white balance
Use latest auto white
.4 Restore auto WB void
balance setting
.5 Exposure (us) int32 1 42000 time in us
Steps through
availableexposure
.6 Exposure (ordinal) int16 0 n
valuesfrom minimum (0)
tomaximum (n)
.7 Dynamic Range Mode int8 enum 0 1 0 = film, 1 = video
Video
.8 Video sharpening level int8 enum 0 3
[0] = file fps as integer
frame rate (eg 24, 25, 30, 50, 60, 120)
fps as integer, valid when
sensor-off-speed set
[1] = sensor (eg 24,25, 30, 33, 48, 50,
frame rate 60, 120), no change will
beperformed if this value
is set to 0
[2] = frame width in pixels
.9 Recording format int16 [3] =
in pixels
frame height
[0]=file-M-rate
[1]=sensor-M-rate,
valid when sensor-
[4] = flags off-speed-set
[2]=sensor-off-speed
[3]=interlaced
[4]=windowed mode
0=Manual Trigger,
1=Iris,
Set auto
.10 int8 0 4 2=Shutter,
exposure mode
3=Iris + Shutter,
4=Shutter + Iris
2
0.0=minimum,
.0 Mic level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0.0=minimum,
.1 Headphone level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
Headphone 0.0=minimum,
.2 fixed16 0 1
program mix 1.0=maximum
0.0=minimum,
.3 Speaker level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
Audio
0=internal mic,
1=line level input,
.4 Input type int8 0 2
2=low mic level input,
3=high mic level input
0.0=minimum,
[0] ch0 0 1
1.0=maximum
.5 Input levels fixed16
0.0=minimum,
[1] ch1 0 1
1.0=maximum
true = powered,
.6 Phantom power boolean
false = not powered
3
bit flags: [0] = display
status, [1] = display
frame guides
uint16
.0 Overlay enables Some cameras don't
bit field
allow separate control of
frame guides and
status overlays.
0=off, 1=2.4:1, 2=2.39:1,
Frame guides style [0] = frame
.1 int8 0 8 3=2.35:1, 4=1.85:1, 5=16:9,
(Camera 3.x) guides style
Output 6=14:9, 7=4:3
Frame guides opacity [1] = frame 0.0=transparent,
.2 fixed16 0.1 1
(Camera 3.x) guide opacity 1.0=opaque
0=off, 1=2.4:1, 2=2.39:1,
[0] = frame
3=2.35:1, 4=1.85:1, 5=16:9,
guides style
Overlays 6=14:9, 7=4:3
(replaces .1 and .2 [1] = frame 0=transparent,
.3 int8 0 100
abovefrom guide opacity 100=opaque
Cameras 4.0) percentage of full frame
[2] = safe area
0 100 used by safe area guide
percentage
(0 means off)
4
0.0=minimum,
.0 Brightness fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
0x4 = zebra
Display int16
.1 Overlay enables 0x8 = peaking
bit field
0.0=minimum,
.2 Zebra level fixed16 0 1
1.0=maximum
7
[0] time _ _ BCD - HHMMSSFF (UCT)
.0 Real Time Clock int32
[1] date _ _ BCD - YYYYMMDD
ISO-639-1 two character
.1 System language string _ _ _
language code
.2 Timezone int32 _ _ _ Minutes offset from UTC
BCD -
Confi- s0DDdddddddddddd
guration where s is the sign:
[0] latitude _ _
0=north (+), 1=south (-); DD
degrees, dddddddddddd
decimal degrees
.3 Location int64
BCD -
sDDDdddddddddddd
where s is the sign:
[1] longitude _ _
0=west (-), 1=east (+); DDD
degrees, dddddddddddd
decimal degrees
8
[0] red -2 2 default 0.0
[1] green -2 2 default 0.0
.0 Lift Adjust fixed16
[2] blue -2 2 default 0.0
[3] luma -2 2 default 0.0
[0] red -4 4 default 0.0
[1] green -4 4 default 0.0
.1 Gamma Adjust fixed16
[2] blue -4 4 default 0.0
[3] luma -4 4 default 0.0
[0] red 0 16 default 1.0
[1] green 0 16 default 1.0
.2 Gain Adjust fixed16
Colour [2] blue 0 16 default 1.0
Correction [3] luma 0 16 default 1.0
[0] red -8 8 default 0.0
[1] green -8 8 default 0.0
.3 Offset Adjust fixed16
[2] blue -8 8 default 0.0
[3] luma -8 8 default 0.0
[0] pivot 0 1 default 0.5
.4 Contrast Adjust fixed16
[1] adj 0 2 default 1.0
Packet
Operation Length Byte
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
parameter
command
operation
reserved
category
length
type
trigger instantaneous
8 4 4 0 0 0 1 0 0
auto focus on camera 4
set exposure to 10 ms on
camera 4 (10 ms = 10000 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00
us = 0x00002710)
1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 12 0 0
Data Flow
A master device such as a broadcast switcher embeds tally information into its program feed which is
broadcast to a number of slave devices such as cameras or camera controllers. The output from the
slave devices is typically fed back to the master device, but may also be sent to a video monitor.
The primary flow of tally information is from the master device to the slaves. Each slave device may
use its device id to extract and display the relevant tally information.
Slave devices pass through the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status, so that
monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge of the
device id they are monitoring.
Assumptions
Any data alignment / padding is explicit in the protocol. Bit fields are packed from LSB first.
Blanking Encoding
One tally control packet may be sent per video frame. Packets are encoded as a SMPTE 291M packet
with DID/SDID x51/x52 in the active region of VANC line 15. A tally control packet may contain up to
256 bytes of tally information.
Packet Format
Each tally status consists of 4 bits of information:
uint4
bit 0: program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0x0)
The first byte of the tally packet contains the monitor device tally status and a version number.
Subsequent bytes of the tally packet contain tally status for pairs of slave devices. The master device
sends tally status for the number of devices configured/supported, up to a maximum of 510.
struct tally
uint8
bit 0: monitor device program tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 1: monitor device preview tally status (0=off, 1=on)
bit 2-3: reserved (0b00)
bit 4-7: protocol version (0b0000)
Slave Device
(1)
Slave Device
Monitor Device
(3)
3 ...
Blackmagic Design
,
Blackmagic Design
www.blackmagicdesign.com/ru/support.
Blackmagic Design
,
"Send us an email" .
Blackmagic Design,
-.
Blackmagic Camera Setup, ,
About Blackmagic Camera Setup.
Mac OS X Blackmagic Camera Setup
. About Blackmagic Camera Setup,
.
Windows Blackmagic Camera Setup
. About Blackmagic Camera Setup,
.
Blackmagic Teranex, Blackmagic
www.blackmagicdesign.com/ru/support, .
,
.
Studio Camera . ,
Blackmagic Design.
,
. ,
Blackmagic Design.
387
12
Blackmagic Design
12 .
, Blackmagic Design
.
, Blackmagic
Design
.
Blackmagic Design .
, ,
.
, , -
, . Blackmagic
Design : ) ,
, ,
Blackmagic Design; ) ,
;
) ,
; )
,
.
BLACKMAGIC DESIGN
. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN
-
. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN
,
, ,
, ,
BLACKMAGIC DESIGN ( )
. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN
. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN
, .
, , .
Copyright 2017 Blackmagic Design. . Blackmagic Design, DeckLink, HDLink, Workgroup Videohub,
Multibridge Pro, Multibridge Extreme, Intensity "Leading the creative video revolution"
.
.
388